UPD98433S9-K6 [NEC]

LAN Controller, 8 Channel(s), 125MBps, CMOS, PBGA756, 45 X 45 MM, PLASTIC, BGA-756;
UPD98433S9-K6
型号: UPD98433S9-K6
厂家: NEC    NEC
描述:

LAN Controller, 8 Channel(s), 125MBps, CMOS, PBGA756, 45 X 45 MM, PLASTIC, BGA-756

时钟 局域网 数据传输 外围集成电路
文件: 总142页 (文件大小:1360K)
中文:  中文翻译
下载:  下载PDF数据表文档文件
Preliminary User’s Manual  
µPD98433  
10/100/1000 Mbps EthernetTM Controller  
Document No. S15212EJ3V0UM00 (3rd edition)  
Date Published September 2003 NS CP(K)  
2001  
Printed in Japan  
[MEMO]  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
2
NOTES FOR CMOS DEVICES  
1
PRECAUTION AGAINST ESD FOR SEMICONDUCTORS  
Note:  
Strong electric field, when exposed to a MOS device, can cause destruction of the gate oxide and  
ultimately degrade the device operation. Steps must be taken to stop generation of static electricity  
as much as possible, and quickly dissipate it once, when it has occurred. Environmental control  
must be adequate. When it is dry, humidifier should be used. It is recommended to avoid using  
insulators that easily build static electricity. Semiconductor devices must be stored and transported  
in an anti-static container, static shielding bag or conductive material. All test and measurement  
tools including work bench and floor should be grounded. The operator should be grounded using  
wrist strap. Semiconductor devices must not be touched with bare hands. Similar precautions need  
to be taken for PW boards with semiconductor devices on it.  
2
HANDLING OF UNUSED INPUT PINS FOR CMOS  
Note:  
No connection for CMOS device inputs can be cause of malfunction. If no connection is provided  
to the input pins, it is possible that an internal input level may be generated due to noise, etc., hence  
causing malfunction. CMOS devices behave differently than Bipolar or NMOS devices. Input levels  
of CMOS devices must be fixed high or low by using a pull-up or pull-down circuitry. Each unused  
pin should be connected to VDD or GND with a resistor, if it is considered to have a possibility of  
being an output pin. All handling related to the unused pins must be judged device by device and  
related specifications governing the devices.  
3
STATUS BEFORE INITIALIZATION OF MOS DEVICES  
Note:  
Power-on does not necessarily define initial status of MOS device. Production process of MOS  
does not define the initial operation status of the device. Immediately after the power source is  
turned ON, the devices with reset function have not yet been initialized. Hence, power-on does  
not guarantee out-pin levels, I/O settings or contents of registers. Device is not initialized until the  
reset signal is received. Reset operation must be executed immediately after power-on for devices  
having reset function.  
Ethernet is a trademark of XEROX Corporation.  
3
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
The information contained in this document is being issued in advance of the production cycle for the  
product. The parameters for the product may change before final production or NEC Electronics  
Corporation, at its own discretion, may withdraw the product prior to its production.  
Not all products and/or types are available in every country. Please check with an NEC Electronics sales  
representative for availability and additional information.  
No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form or by any means without the prior written consent  
of NEC Electronics. NEC Electronics assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document.  
NEC Electronics does not assume any liability for infringement of patents, copyrights or other intellectual property  
rights of third parties by or arising from the use of NEC Electronics products listed in this document or any other  
liability arising from the use of such products. No license, express, implied or otherwise, is granted under any  
patents, copyrights or other intellectual property rights of NEC Electronics or others.  
Descriptions of circuits, software and other related information in this document are provided for illustrative purposes  
in semiconductor product operation and application examples. The incorporation of these circuits, software and  
information in the design of a customer's equipment shall be done under the full responsibility of the customer. NEC  
Electronics assumes no responsibility for any losses incurred by customers or third parties arising from the use of  
these circuits, software and information.  
While NEC Electronics endeavors to enhance the quality, reliability and safety of NEC Electronics products,  
customers agree and acknowledge that the possibility of defects thereof cannot be eliminated entirely. To minimize  
risks of damage to property or injury (including death) to persons arising from defects in NEC Electronics products,  
customers must incorporate sufficient safety measures in their design, such as redundancy, fire-containment and  
anti-failure features.  
NEC Electronics products are classified into the following three quality grades: "Standard", "Special" and "Specific".  
The "Specific" quality grade applies only to NEC Electronics products developed based on a customer-designated  
"quality assurance program" for a specific application. The recommended applications of an NEC Electronics  
products depend on its quality grade, as indicated below. Customers must check the quality grade of each NEC  
Electronics product before using it in a particular application.  
"Standard": Computers, office equipment, communications equipment, test and measurement equipment, audio and  
visual equipment, home electronic appliances, machine tools, personal electronic equipment and  
industrial robots.  
"Special": Transportation equipment (automobiles, trains, ships, etc.), traffic control systems, anti-disaster  
systems, anti-crime systems, safety equipment and medical equipment (not specifically designed for life  
support).  
"Specific": Aircraft, aerospace equipment, submersible repeaters, nuclear reactor control systems, life support  
systems and medical equipment for life support, etc.  
The quality grade of NEC Electronics products is "Standard" unless otherwise expressly specified in NEC  
Electronics data sheets or data books, etc. If customers wish to use NEC Electronics products in applications  
not intended by NEC Electronics, they must contact an NEC Electronics sales representative in advance to  
determine NEC Electronics' willingness to support a given application.  
(Note)  
(1) "NEC Electronics" as used in this statement means NEC Electronics Corporation and also includes its  
majority-owned subsidiaries.  
(2) "NEC Electronics products" means any product developed or manufactured by or for NEC Electronics (as  
defined above).  
M5D 02. 11-1  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
4
Major Revisions in This Edition  
Page  
Description  
pp. 13 to 15  
1.3 Pin Configuration  
Modified the names of pins No. 64 (AP31), 359 (C17), and 428 (AK31).  
p. 17  
Changed the figure of 1.5 Sample System Configuration  
pp. 18, 22, 24, 27 CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS  
Modified the description of the pins; TX_CLK[7:0], GTX_CLK[7:0], RX_CLK[7:0]0.  
Modified the numbers of the pins; INT#, TEST[3, 1, 0] and TEST[5, 4, 2].  
p. 31  
p. 33  
p. 34  
p. 36  
Modified the description in 3.2.9 Operation clocks.  
Modified the description in 3.4.1 (2) Addition of CRC and (3) Addition of PAD.  
Modified the description in 3.4.2 Start of packet transmission.  
Modified the description in 3.4.5 (6) Occurrence of transmit FIFO underrun and (7)  
Occurrence of parity errors.  
p. 36  
Added 3.4.5 (8) Transmit FIFO overrun.  
p. 37  
Modified the SFD-bit pattern in 3.5.1 Preamble and SFD detection.  
Added the conditions of receive packet filtering in 3.5.4 Packet filtering.  
Modified the description of the RPPD bit in Table 3-1. Receive Status Information.  
Added description in 3.6 Full-Duplex Operation.  
p. 37  
p. 40  
p. 41  
p. 54  
Modified the description in 3.8.4 (1) MDC clock.  
p. 61  
Modified the description in 3.10 Back Pressure.  
p. 61  
Modified the bit width of the counters in 3.12 Statistics Counters.  
Modified the description in 3.13 Loopback.  
p. 62  
p. 62  
Modified the description in 3.14 Low Power Mode.  
Added 3.16 Turning Power ON.  
p. 64  
pp. 65 to 113  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
Added CLKCHK register to global registers.  
Modified register address name of PCS configuration registers.  
Modified the description of registers; MACC1, MACC2, IPGIFG, HDREG, LMAX, MCMD, CAR1,  
CAR2, CAM1, CAM2, AFR, ICFPT, TSVREG, RSVREG, FSVREG, RFIC3, TFIC1, MISCR,  
PYSTS, PYTBIC.  
Modified default value of VERID register.  
pp.114 to 128  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
Modified bit map of all counters to 32 bits.  
Modified register names and functions in register address 86H and A6H.  
Modified the descriptions of counters; RXPF, ROVR, RJBR, TOVR, RDRP, TFPE.  
p. 133  
Modified the description in 6.4.2 (1) Test-Logic-Reset.  
The mark shows major revised points.  
5
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
PREFACE  
Target Readers  
Purpose  
This manual is intended for users who wish to understand the functions of the µPD98433  
and to design and develop systems using it.  
This manual is intended to give users an understanding of the hardware functions of the  
µPD98433 described in the Organization below.  
Organization  
The contents of this manual are structured as follows.  
Overview  
Pin functions  
Function description  
Register description  
Statistics counters  
JTAG boundary scan  
How to Read This Manual It is assumed that the reader of this manual has general knowledge in the fields of  
electrical engineering, logic circuits, and microcontrollers.  
To understand the overall functions of the µPD98433:  
Read this manual in the order of the Contents.  
Conventions  
Data significance:  
Higher digits on the left and lower digits on the right  
Active low representation: XXX# (# after pin or signal name)  
Memory map address:  
Higher addresses on the top and lower addresses on the  
bottom  
Note:  
Footnote for item marked with Note in the text  
Information requiring particular attention  
Supplementary information  
Caution:  
Remark:  
Numerical representation: Binary ... ×××× or ××××B  
Decimal ... ××××  
Hexadecimal ... ××××H  
Prefix indicating the power of 2 (address space, memory capacity):  
K (kilo):  
210 = 1024  
M (mega): 220 = 10242  
G (giga): 230 = 10243  
Related Documents  
The related documents indicated in this publication may include preliminary versions.  
However, preliminary versions are not marked as such.  
Data sheet: S15238E  
6
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CONTENTS  
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW..........................................................................................................................11  
1.1 Features .......................................................................................................................................11  
1.2 Ordering Information..................................................................................................................11  
1.3 Pin Configuration........................................................................................................................12  
1.4 Internal Block Diagram...............................................................................................................17  
1.5 Sample System Configuration...................................................................................................17  
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS................................................................................................................18  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION................................................................................................28  
3.1 System Configuration.................................................................................................................28  
3.2 Function Blocks..........................................................................................................................29  
3.2.1  
3.2.2  
3.2.3  
3.2.4  
3.2.5  
3.2.6  
3.2.7  
3.2.8  
3.2.9  
MAC module .................................................................................................................................. 29  
PCS module................................................................................................................................... 30  
Station Address Logic (SAL) module ............................................................................................. 30  
Statistics counter (STAT) module .................................................................................................. 30  
On-chip FIFO ................................................................................................................................. 30  
FIFO bus module ........................................................................................................................... 30  
MII management module ............................................................................................................... 30  
Register bus module ...................................................................................................................... 31  
Operation clocks ............................................................................................................................ 31  
3.3 Frame Formats............................................................................................................................32  
3.4 Transmit Operation.....................................................................................................................33  
3.4.1  
3.4.2  
3.4.3  
3.4.4  
3.4.5  
Generation of transmit packets ...................................................................................................... 33  
Start of packet transmission........................................................................................................... 34  
Setting interpacket gaps................................................................................................................. 34  
Collisions and retransmission ........................................................................................................ 35  
End of transmission and abort ....................................................................................................... 35  
3.5 Receive Operations ....................................................................................................................37  
3.5.1  
3.5.2  
3.5.3  
3.5.4  
3.5.5  
3.5.6  
3.5.7  
3.5.8  
Preamble and SFD detection......................................................................................................... 37  
Length field check.......................................................................................................................... 37  
CRC check..................................................................................................................................... 37  
Packet filtering ............................................................................................................................... 37  
Address filtering ............................................................................................................................. 38  
Receive FIFO overflow................................................................................................................... 38  
Clearing receive FIFO.................................................................................................................... 39  
Adding status information............................................................................................................... 39  
3.6 Full-Duplex Operation ................................................................................................................41  
3.7 System Bus Interface .................................................................................................................42  
3.7.1  
3.7.2  
FIFO bus interface ......................................................................................................................... 42  
Register bus interface .................................................................................................................... 51  
3.8 Network Interface........................................................................................................................53  
3.8.1  
3.8.2  
3.8.3  
GMII (Gigabit Media Independent Interface).................................................................................. 53  
TBI (Ten Bit Interface).................................................................................................................... 53  
MII (Media Independent Interface)................................................................................................. 53  
7
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
3.8.4  
3.8.5  
3.8.6  
MII management interface..............................................................................................................54  
µPD98433 connection of MII output signal pins .............................................................................56  
Auto-negotiation .............................................................................................................................56  
3.9 Flow Control ................................................................................................................................57  
3.9.1  
3.9.2  
3.9.3  
Control frame reception..................................................................................................................57  
Flow control pause timer ................................................................................................................57  
Pause control frame transmission ..................................................................................................58  
3.10 Back Pressure .............................................................................................................................61  
3.11 Operations on VLAN Frames .....................................................................................................61  
3.11.1 VLAN frame detection ....................................................................................................................61  
3.11.2 VLAN frame reception....................................................................................................................61  
3.11.3 VLAN frame transmission...............................................................................................................61  
3.12 Statistics Counters .....................................................................................................................61  
3.13 Loopback .....................................................................................................................................62  
3.14 Low Power Mode.........................................................................................................................62  
3.15 Software Reset ............................................................................................................................63  
3.16 Turning Power ON.......................................................................................................................64  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION................................................................................................65  
4.1 Control Register Map..................................................................................................................65  
4.2 Port Configuration Registers.....................................................................................................67  
4.3 Global Registers..........................................................................................................................99  
4.4 PCS Configuration Registers.................................................................................................. 104  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS............................................................................................... 114  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN ............................................................................................. 129  
6.1 Features .................................................................................................................................... 129  
6.2 Internal Configuration of Boundary Scan Circuit................................................................. 130  
6.2.1  
6.2.2  
6.2.3  
6.2.4  
Instruction register........................................................................................................................130  
TAP (Test Access Port) controller................................................................................................130  
Bypass register ............................................................................................................................130  
Boundary scan register ................................................................................................................130  
6.3 Pin Function.............................................................................................................................. 131  
6.3.1  
6.3.2  
6.3.3  
6.3.4  
6.3.5  
TCK (JTAG Test Clock) pin..........................................................................................................131  
TMS (JTAG Test Mode Select) pin ..............................................................................................131  
TDI (JTAG Test Data Input) pin....................................................................................................131  
TDO (JTAG Test Data Output) pin...............................................................................................131  
TRST# (JTAG Reset) pin .............................................................................................................131  
6.4 Operation Description ............................................................................................................. 132  
6.4.1  
6.4.2  
TAP controller ..............................................................................................................................132  
TAP controller state......................................................................................................................132  
6.5 TAP Controller Operation........................................................................................................ 137  
6.6 Initializing TAP Controller ....................................................................................................... 140  
6.7 Instruction Register ................................................................................................................. 140  
6.7.1  
6.7.2  
6.7.3  
BYPASS instruction......................................................................................................................141  
EXTEST instruction......................................................................................................................141  
SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction ...................................................................................................141  
8
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
LIST OF FIGURES  
Figure No.  
Title  
Page  
3-1  
Sample System Configuration Using µPD98433 ............................................................................................28  
µPD98433 Function Block Diagram................................................................................................................29  
Ethernet/IEEE802.3 Frame Structure.............................................................................................................32  
VLAN Frame Structure ...................................................................................................................................32  
Configuration of Status and RBYT Fields.......................................................................................................39  
FIFO Interface Write Timing ...........................................................................................................................42  
Timing of Switching Transmit Data Write Port Using TXFPT[2:0]...................................................................44  
FIFO Interface Read Timing...........................................................................................................................45  
Timing of Switching Ports After Receive Data Is Read...................................................................................47  
Timing of Switching Read Port Due to SKIP Signal (Before Start of Read)....................................................48  
Timing of Read Port Switch Due to SKIP Signal (During Read) .....................................................................49  
Register Address Bus.....................................................................................................................................51  
MII Management Frame Structure..................................................................................................................55  
Connection of MII Output Signal Pin...............................................................................................................56  
Pause Control Frame Transmission ...............................................................................................................58  
Reissuance of Pause Control Frame by Pause Retransmission Interval Timer..............................................59  
Recommended Timing of Turning Power ON.................................................................................................64  
3-2  
3-3  
3-4  
3-5  
3-6  
3-7  
3-8  
3-9  
3-10  
3-11  
3-12  
3-13  
3-14  
3-15  
3-16  
3-17  
6-1  
6-2  
6-3  
6-4  
6-5  
Block Diagram of Boundary Scan Circuit......................................................................................................130  
State Transition of TAP Controller................................................................................................................132  
Operation Timing in Controller State ............................................................................................................133  
Operation of Test Logic (Instruction Scan) ...................................................................................................138  
Operation of Test Logic (Data Scan) ............................................................................................................139  
9
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
LIST OF TABLES  
No.  
Title  
Page  
3-1  
3-2  
3-3  
3-4  
3-5  
Receive Status Information.............................................................................................................................40  
RBYT Field .....................................................................................................................................................41  
TXFDQ Pins and Transmit Data Attributes.....................................................................................................43  
RXFDQ Pins and Receive Data Attributes......................................................................................................46  
CLKS Field of MIIC Register and Frequency of MDC.....................................................................................54  
4-1  
6-1  
Pause Order of Precedence Resolution Table..............................................................................................107  
Operation in Each Controller State ...............................................................................................................137  
10  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW  
The µPD98433 is a 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet controller with an eight-port on-chip Media Access Control (MAC)  
function compliant with IEEE Standard 802.3 1998 Edition. Its main features are as follows.  
1.1 Features  
8-port 10/100/1000 Mbps on-chip MAC compliant with IEEE Standard 802.3 1998 Edition  
Interface with physical layer device can be selected from TBI, GMII, and MII  
On-chip 6 KB receive FIFO and 6 KB transmit FIFO for each port  
On-chip high-speed FIFO data bus of 128 bits × 125 MHz per transmit or receive  
On-chip data bus of 32 bits × 62.5 MHz as a CPU bus  
Full-duplex operation (for 10/100/1000 Mbps operation) or half-duplex operation (for 10/100 Mbps operation) is  
possible  
Compatible with IEEE Standard 802.3 1998 Edition flow control  
Compatible with IEEE Standard 802.3 1998 Edition 8B10B PCS Encoder/Decoder  
Compatible with IEEE Standard 802.3 1998 Edition Chapter 37 Auto-Negotiation  
Filtering that responds to address types can be established  
Provides statistical information for supporting RMON/SNMP  
On-chip functions including VLAN frame detection function, low power function, and others  
JTAG support  
0.25 µm CMOS process 2.5 V, 3.3 V dual system power supply  
Package: 756-pin plastic BGA  
1.2 Ordering Information  
Part No.  
Package  
µPD98433S9-K6  
756-pin plastic BGA (C/D advanced type) (45 × 45)  
11  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW  
1.3 Pin Configuration  
µPD98433  
756-pin plastic BGA  
Top view  
Index mark  
067  
195  
100  
34  
32  
226  
33  
31  
315  
344  
427  
454  
531  
556  
30  
28  
627  
650  
29  
27  
715  
736  
26  
24  
25  
23  
22  
20  
21  
19  
µPD98433  
756-pin plastic BGA  
Bottom view  
18  
16  
17  
15  
14  
12  
13  
11  
10  
8
9
7
756  
673  
694  
581  
604  
6
4
481  
506  
5
3
373  
400  
257  
286  
133  
164  
2
034  
001  
1
AN  
AL  
AJ  
AG  
AE  
AC  
AA  
W
U
R
N
L
J
G
E
C
A
Index mark  
AP  
AM  
AK  
AH  
AF  
AD  
AB  
Y
V
T
P
M
K
H
F
D
B
12  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW  
(1/4)  
Pin No.  
1 (A1)  
2 (B1)  
3 (C1)  
4 (D1)  
5 (E1)  
6 (F1)  
7 (G1)  
8 (H1)  
Pin Name  
GND  
GND  
GND  
FC7  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
TXD24  
51 (AP18) RXFDQ0  
52 (AP19) RXFCK  
53 (AP20) VDD  
101 (A33) GND  
102 (A32) GND  
103 (A31) TXFBA3  
104 (A30) TXFBA0  
105 (A29) VDD  
151 (Y2)  
152 (AA2) TX_ER2  
153 (AB2) COL2  
54 (AP21) RXFD74  
55 (AP22) RXFD80  
56 (AP23) RXFD86  
57 (AP24) RXFD92  
58 (AP25) RXFD97  
59 (AP26) VDDQ  
60 (AP27) RXFD108  
61 (AP28) RXFD114  
62 (AP29) VDD  
63 (AP30) TMS  
64 (AP31) TEST4  
65 (AP32) GND  
66 (AP33) GND  
67 (AP34) GND  
154 (AC2) RXD26  
155 (AD2) RXD23  
156 (AE2) RXD20  
157 (AF2) TX_ER3  
158 (AG2) LINK3#  
159 (AH2) RX_DV3  
160 (AJ2) RXD34  
161 (AK2) RXD32  
162 (AL2) RXFD3  
163 (AM2) GND  
TXFD4  
VDD  
106 (A28) TXFD114  
107 (A27) TXFD108  
108 (A26) VDDQ  
109 (A25) TXFD97  
110 (A24) TXFD92  
111 (A23) TXFD86  
112 (A22) TXFD80  
113 (A21) TXFD74  
114 (A20) VDD  
115 (A19) TXFCK  
116 (A18) TXFDQ0  
117 (A17) TXFD62  
118 (A16) TXFD56  
119 (A15) VDD  
TXD06  
EWRAP0  
VDDQ  
TXD10  
TXD12  
TXD15  
EWRAP1  
RX_CLK11  
VDD  
CRS1  
HD4  
HA2  
HA8  
9 (J1)  
10 (K1)  
11 (L1)  
12 (M1)  
13 (N1)  
14 (P1)  
15 (R1)  
16 (T1)  
17 (U1)  
18 (V1)  
19 (W1)  
20 (Y1)  
21 (AA1)  
22 (AB1)  
23 (AC1)  
24 (AD1)  
25 (AE1)  
26 (AF1)  
27 (AG1)  
28 (AH1)  
29 (AJ1)  
30 (AK1)  
31 (AL1)  
32 (AM1)  
33 (AN1)  
34 (AP1)  
35 (AP2)  
36 (AP3)  
37 (AP4)  
38 (AP5)  
39 (AP6)  
40 (AP7)  
41 (AP8)  
42 (AP9)  
164 (AN2) GND  
165 (AN3) GND  
166 (AN4) RXETH2  
167 (AN5) RXFPT0  
168 (AN6) RXFPT2  
169 (AN7) RXFD6  
170 (AN8) RXFD12  
171 (AN9) RXFD17  
172 (AN10) RXFD23  
173 (AN11) RXFD29  
174 (AN12) RXFD34  
175 (AN13) RXFD40  
176 (AN14) RXFD46  
177 (AN15) RXFD51  
178 (AN16) RXFD57  
179 (AN17) RXFD63  
180 (AN18) RXFDQ1  
181 (AN19) RXFD64  
182 (AN20) RXFD69  
183 (AN21) RXFD75  
184 (AN22) RXFD81  
185 (AN23) RXFD87  
186 (AN24) RXFD93  
187 (AN25) RXFD98  
188 (AN26) RXFD103  
189 (AN27) RXFD109  
190 (AN28) RXFD115  
191 (AN29) RXFD120  
192 (AN30) TCK  
68 (AN34) GND  
69 (AM34) GND  
70 (AL34) RXD40  
71 (AK34) RXD43  
72 (AJ34) VDD  
VDD  
120 (A14) TXFD45  
121 (A13) TXFD39  
122 (A12) TXFD33  
123 (A11) TXFD28  
124 (A10) TXFD22  
GTX_CLK2  
RX_CLK20  
RXD25  
RXD22  
CRS2  
VDDQ  
COL3  
RXD37  
VDD  
RXFD4  
RXETH7  
GND  
GND  
GND  
73 (AH34) COL4  
74 (AG34) TX_ER4  
75 (AF34) VDDQ  
76 (AE34) CRS5  
77 (AD34) RXD55  
78 (AC34) RX_CLK50  
79 (AB34) GTX_CLK5  
80 (AA34) TXD54  
81 (Y34)  
82 (W34)  
83 (V34)  
84 (U34)  
85 (T34)  
86 (R34)  
87 (P34)  
88 (N34)  
89 (M34)  
90 (L34)  
91 (K34)  
92 (J34)  
93 (H34)  
94 (G34)  
95 (F34)  
96 (E34)  
97 (D34)  
98 (C34)  
99 (B34)  
125 (A9)  
126 (A8)  
127 (A7)  
128 (A6)  
129 (A5)  
130 (A4)  
131 (A3)  
132 (A2)  
133 (B2)  
134 (C2)  
135 (D2)  
136 (E2)  
137 (F2)  
138 (G2)  
139 (H2)  
140 (J2)  
141 (K2)  
142 (L2)  
143 (M2)  
144 (N2)  
145 (P2)  
146 (R2)  
147 (T2)  
148 (U2)  
149 (V2)  
150 (W2)  
VDDQ  
TXFD11  
TXFD5  
VDD  
TXFEN#  
FC1  
GND  
GND  
GND  
GND  
TXFD3  
TXD01  
TXD03  
TXD07  
TX_CLK0  
RX_ER0  
TXD11  
TXD13  
TXD16  
TX_CLK1  
RX_ER1  
RXD14  
HRW  
VDD  
HD12  
HD18  
HD24  
HD30  
VDD  
RX_DV6  
LINK6#  
TXD67  
TXD63  
TXD60  
VDDQ  
LINK7#  
TX_EN7  
VDD  
GND  
GND  
RXETH1  
RXFEN#  
VDD  
RXFD5  
RXFD11  
VDDQ  
43 (AP10) RXFD22  
44 (AP11) RXFD28  
45 (AP12) RXFD33  
46 (AP13) RXFD39  
47 (AP14) RXFD45  
48 (AP15) VDD  
193 (AN31) TDO  
194 (AN32) GND  
195 (AN33) GND  
196 (AM33) GND  
197 (AL33) CRS4  
198 (AK33) RXD42  
199 (AJ33) RXD46  
200 (AH33) RX_CLK40  
TXD72  
TXD70  
GND  
HD5  
HA3  
HA9  
49 (AP16) RXFD56  
50 (AP17) RXFD62  
GND  
100 (A34) GND  
13  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW  
(2/4)  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
251 (B8)  
252 (B7)  
253 (B6)  
254 (B5)  
255 (B4)  
256 (B3)  
257 (C3)  
258 (D3)  
259 (E3)  
260 (F3)  
261 (G3)  
262 (H3)  
263 (J3)  
264 (K3)  
265 (L3)  
266 (M3)  
267 (N3)  
268 (P3)  
269 (R3)  
270 (T3)  
271 (U3)  
272 (V3)  
273 (W3)  
274 (Y3)  
275 (AA3) TX_EN2  
276 (AB3) LINK2#  
277 (AC3) RXD27  
278 (AD3) RXD24  
279 (AE3) RXD21  
280 (AF3) TX_EN3  
281 (AG3) TX_CLK3  
282 (AH3) RX_ER3  
283 (AJ3) RXD35  
284 (AK3) RXD33  
285 (AL3) RXETH0  
286 (AM3) GND  
Pin Name  
TXFD12  
TXFD6  
TXFPT2  
TXFPT0  
FC2  
GND  
GND  
FC0  
TXD02  
TXD04  
TX_EN0  
LINK0#  
RX_DV0  
RXD04  
TXD14  
TXD17  
LINK1#  
RX_DV1  
RXD13  
HD0  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
201 (AG33) GTX_CLK4  
202 (AF33) TXD44  
203 (AE33) RXD50  
204 (AD33) RXD54  
205 (AC33) RX_CLK51  
206 (AB33) EWRAP5  
207 (AA33) TXD55  
208 (Y33) HD6  
209 (W33) HD11  
210 (V33) HD17  
211 (U33) HD23  
212 (T33) HD29  
213 (R33) RXD62  
214 (P33) RXD67  
215 (N33) COL6  
216 (M33) TX_EN6  
217 (L33) TXD64  
218 (K33) TXD61  
219 (J33) RXD77  
220 (H33) COL7  
221 (G33) TX_ER7  
222 (F33) TXD75  
223 (E33) TXD73  
224 (D33) TXD71  
225 (C33) GND  
301 (AM18) RXFDQ2  
302 (AM19) RXFD65  
303 (AM20) RXFD70  
304 (AM21) RXFD76  
305 (AM22) RXFD82  
306 (AM23) RXFD88  
307 (AM24) RXFD94  
308 (AM25) RXFD99  
309 (AM26) RXFD104  
310 (AM27) RXFD110  
311 (AM28) RXFD116  
312 (AM29) RXFD121  
313 (AM30) TDI  
351 (C25) TXFD99  
352 (C24) TXFD94  
353 (C23) TXFD88  
354 (C22) TXFD82  
355 (C21) TXFD76  
356 (C20) TXFD70  
357 (C19) TXFD65  
358 (C18) TXFDQ2  
359 (C17) TEST3  
360 (C16) TXFD58  
361 (C15) TXFD52  
362 (C14) TXFD47  
363 (C13) TXFD41  
364 (C12) TXFD35  
365 (C11) TXFD30  
366 (C10) TXFD24  
314 (AM31) TRST#  
315 (AM32) GND  
316 (AL32) RXFCKOUT  
317 (AK32) RXD41  
318 (AJ32) RXD45  
319 (AH32) RX_CLK41  
320 (AG32) EWRAP4  
321 (AF32) TXD45  
322 (AE32) RXD51  
323 (AD32) RXD53  
324 (AC32) RX_ER5  
325 (AB32) TX_CLK5  
326 (AA32) TXD56  
327 (Y32) TXD53  
328 (W32) HD10  
367 (C9)  
368 (C8)  
369 (C7)  
370 (C6)  
371 (C5)  
372 (C4)  
373 (D4)  
374 (E4)  
375 (F4)  
376 (G4)  
377 (H4)  
378 (J4)  
379 (K4)  
380 (L4)  
381 (M4)  
382 (N4)  
383 (P4)  
384 (R4)  
385 (T4)  
386 (U4)  
387 (V4)  
388 (W4)  
389 (Y4)  
TXFD18  
TXFD13  
TXFD7  
TXFD0  
TXFPT1  
FC3  
HACK#  
HA4  
HA10  
VDD  
FC4  
TXD23  
TXD05  
TX_ER0  
COL0  
RXD07  
RXD03  
VDD  
TX_EN1  
GND  
RXD17  
RXD12  
HD1  
226 (B33) GND  
227 (B32) GND  
228 (B31) TXFBA4  
229 (B30) TXFBA1  
230 (B29) TXFD120  
231 (B28) TXFD115  
232 (B27) TXFD109  
233 (B26) TXFD103  
234 (B25) TXFD98  
235 (B24) TXFD93  
236 (B23) TXFD87  
237 (B22) TXFD81  
238 (B21) TXFD75  
239 (B20) TXFD69  
240 (B19) TXFD64  
241 (B18) TXFDQ1  
242 (B17) TXFD63  
243 (B16) TXFD57  
244 (B15) TXFD51  
245 (B14) TXFD46  
246 (B13) TXFD40  
247 (B12) TXFD34  
248 (B11) TXFD29  
249 (B10) TXFD23  
329 (V32) HD16  
330 (U32) HD22  
331 (T32) HD28  
332 (R32) RXD61  
333 (P32) RXD66  
334 (N32) RX_CLK60  
335 (M32) TX_ER6  
336 (L32) TXD65  
337 (K32) CRS7  
338 (J32) RXD76  
339 (H32) RX_CLK70  
340 (G32) GTX_CLK7  
341 (F32) TXD76  
342 (E32) TXD74  
343 (D32) TXFBA7  
344 (C32) GND  
345 (C31) TXFBA6  
346 (C30) TXFBA2  
347 (C29) TXFD121  
348 (C28) TXFD116  
349 (C27) TXFD110  
350 (C26) TXFD104  
HCLK  
HA5  
HCS#  
TXD22  
287 (AM4) RXETH3  
288 (AM5) RXFPT1  
289 (AM6) RXFD0  
290 (AM7) RXFD7  
291 (AM8) RXFD13  
292 (AM9) RXFD18  
293 (AM10) RXFD24  
294 (AM11) RXFD30  
295 (AM12) RXFD35  
296 (AM13) RXFD41  
297 (AM14) RXFD47  
298 (AM15) RXFD52  
299 (AM16) RXFD58  
300 (AM17) RXABT  
390 (AA4) TXD27  
391 (AB4) GND  
392 (AC4) RX_DV2  
393 (AD4) VDD  
394 (AE4) TXD34  
395 (AF4) TXD37  
396 (AG4) VDD  
397 (AH4) RX_CLK31  
398 (AJ4) RXD36  
399 (AK4) RXETH4  
400 (AL4) VDD  
250 (B9)  
TXFD17  
14  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW  
(3/4)  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
401 (AL5) RXETH5  
402 (AL6) RXFD1  
403 (AL7) RXFD8  
404 (AL8) RXFD14  
405 (AL9) RXFD19  
406 (AL10) RXFD25  
407 (AL11) VDD  
408 (AL12) RXFD36  
409 (AL13) RXFD42  
410 (AL14) RXFD48  
411 (AL15) RXFD53  
412 (AL16) RXFD59  
413 (AL17) SKIP  
414 (AL18) RXFDQ3  
415 (AL19) RXFD66  
416 (AL20) RXFD71  
417 (AL21) RXFD77  
418 (AL22) RXFD83  
419 (AL23) RXFD89  
420 (AL24) VDD  
421 (AL25) RXFD100  
422 (AL26) RXFD105  
423 (AL27) RXFD111  
424 (AL28) RXFD117  
425 (AL29) RXFD122  
426 (AL30) RXFD125  
427 (AL31) VDD  
428 (AK31) TEST5  
429 (AJ31) RXD44  
430 (AH31) RX_ER4  
431 (AG31) VDD  
432 (AF31) TXD46  
433 (AE31) RXD52  
434 (AD31) VDD  
435 (AC31) RX_DV5  
436 (AB31) GND  
437 (AA31) TXD57  
438 (Y31) TXD52  
439 (W31) HD9  
451 (G31) VDD  
501 (AE5) TXD33  
502 (AF5) TXD36  
503 (AG5) EWRAP3  
504 (AH5) RX_CLK30  
505 (AJ5) CRS3  
551 (K30) RXD71  
552 (J30) RXD74  
553 (H30) RX_ER7  
554 (G30) EWRAP7  
555 (F30) TXFD127  
556 (E30) TXFD126  
557 (E29) TXFD123  
558 (E28) TXFD118  
559 (E27) TXFD112  
560 (E26) TXFD106  
561 (E25) TXFD101  
562 (E24) TXFD95  
563 (E23) TXFD90  
564 (E22) TXFD84  
565 (E21) TXFD78  
566 (E20) TXFD72  
567 (E19) TXFD67  
568 (E18) TXFDQ4  
569 (E17) TEST0  
570 (E16) TXFD60  
571 (E15) TXFD54  
572 (E14) TXFD49  
573 (E13) TXFD43  
574 (E12) TXFD37  
575 (E11) TXFD31  
576 (E10) TXFD26  
452 (F31) TXD77  
453 (E31) TXFBA5  
454 (D31) VDD  
455 (D30) TXFD125  
456 (D29) TXFD122  
457 (D28) TXFD117  
458 (D27) TXFD111  
459 (D26) TXFD105  
460 (D25) TXFD100  
461 (D24) VDD  
462 (D23) TXFD89  
463 (D22) TXFD83  
464 (D21) TXFD77  
465 (D20) TXFD71  
466 (D19) TXFD66  
467 (D18) TXFDQ3  
468 (D17) TEST1  
469 (D16) TXFD59  
470 (D15) TXFD53  
471 (D14) TXFD48  
472 (D13) TXFD42  
473 (D12) TXFD36  
474 (D11) VDD  
506 (AK5) RXETH6  
507 (AK6) RXFD2  
508 (AK7) RXFD9  
509 (AK8) RXFD15  
510 (AK9) RXFD20  
511 (AK10) RXFD26  
512 (AK11) RXFD31  
513 (AK12) RXFD37  
514 (AK13) RXFD43  
515 (AK14) RXFD49  
516 (AK15) RXFD54  
517 (AK16) RXFD60  
518 (AK17) PASS  
519 (AK18) RXFDQ4  
520 (AK19) RXFD67  
521 (AK20) RXFD72  
522 (AK21) RXFD78  
523 (AK22) RXFD84  
524 (AK23) RXFD90  
525 (AK24) RXFD95  
526 (AK25) RXFD101  
527 (AK26) RXFD106  
528 (AK27) RXFD112  
529 (AK28) RXFD118  
530 (AK29) RXFD123  
531 (AK30) RXFD126  
532 (AJ30) RXFD127  
533 (AH30) RX_DV4  
534 (AG30) TX_CLK4  
535 (AF30) TXD47  
536 (AE30) TXD42  
537 (AD30) TXD41  
538 (AC30) RXD57  
539 (AB30) LINK5#  
540 (AA30) TX_EN5  
541 (Y30) TXD51  
542 (W30) HD8  
475 (D10) TXFD25  
476 (D9)  
477 (D8)  
478 (D7)  
479 (D6)  
480 (D5)  
481 (E5)  
482 (F5)  
483 (G5)  
484 (H5)  
485 (J5)  
486 (K5)  
487 (L5)  
488 (M5)  
489 (N5)  
490 (P5)  
491 (R5)  
492 (T5)  
493 (U5)  
494 (V5)  
495 (W5)  
496 (Y5)  
TXFD19  
TXFD14  
TXFD8  
TXFD1  
FC5  
577 (E9)  
578 (E8)  
579 (E7)  
580 (E6)  
581 (F6)  
582 (G6)  
583 (H6)  
584 (J6)  
585 (K6)  
586 (L6)  
587 (M6)  
588 (N6)  
589 (P6)  
590 (R6)  
591 (T6)  
592 (U6)  
593 (V6)  
594 (W6)  
595 (Y6)  
TXFD20  
TXFD15  
TXFD9  
TXFD2  
MDC  
TXD00  
RX_CLK01  
RXD05  
RXD01  
CRS0  
GTX_CLK1  
RX_CLK10  
RXD15  
RXD10  
HD3  
FC6  
MDIO  
GTX_CLK0  
RX_CLK00  
RXD06  
RXD02  
RXD00  
TX_ER1  
COL1  
RXD16  
RXD11  
HD2  
440 (V31) HD15  
441 (U31) HD21  
442 (T31) HD27  
443 (R31) RXD60  
444 (P31) RXD65  
445 (N31) GND  
446 (M31) GTX_CLK6  
447 (L31) GTX_REF_CLK 497 (AA5) TXD26  
HA1  
HA7  
RESET#  
TXD20  
HA0  
HA6  
INT#  
TXD21  
543 (V30) HD14  
544 (U30) HD20  
545 (T30) HD26  
546 (R30) CRS6  
547 (P30) RXD64  
548 (N30) RX_CLK61  
549 (M30) EWRAP6  
550 (L30) TXD66  
596 (AA6) TXD25  
597 (AB6) EWRAP2  
598 (AC6) RX_CLK21  
599 (AD6) TXD30  
600 (AE6) TXD32  
448 (K31) RXD72  
449 (J31) RXD75  
450 (H31) RX_CLK71  
498 (AB5) TX_CLK2  
499 (AC5) RX_ER2  
500 (AD5) TXD31  
15  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW  
(4/4)  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
601 (AF6) TXD35  
602 (AG6) GTX_CLK3  
603 (AH6) RXD31  
604 (AJ6) RXD30  
605 (AJ7) RXFD10  
606 (AJ8) RXFD16  
607 (AJ9) RXFD21  
608 (AJ10) RXFD27  
609 (AJ11) RXFD32  
610 (AJ12) RXFD38  
611 (AJ13) RXFD44  
612 (AJ14) RXFD50  
613 (AJ15) RXFD55  
614 (AJ16) RXFD61  
615 (AJ17) RXFA  
616 (AJ18) RXPAR  
617 (AJ19) RXFD68  
618 (AJ20) RXFD73  
619 (AJ21) RXFD79  
620 (AJ22) RXFD85  
621 (AJ23) RXFD91  
622 (AJ24) RXFD96  
623 (AJ25) RXFD102  
624 (AJ26) RXFD107  
625 (AJ27) RXFD113  
626 (AJ28) RXFD119  
627 (AJ29) RXFD124  
628 (AH29) RXD47  
629 (AG29) LINK4#  
630 (AF29) TX_EN4  
631 (AE29) TXD43  
632 (AD29) TXD40  
633 (AC29) RXD56  
634 (AB29) COL5  
651 (F28) TXFD119  
652 (F27) TXFD113  
653 (F26) TXFD107  
654 (F25) TXFD102  
655 (F24) TXFD96  
656 (F23) TXFD91  
657 (F22) TXFD85  
658 (F21) TXFD79  
659 (F20) TXFD73  
660 (F19) TXFD68  
661 (F18) TXPAR  
662 (F17) TEST2  
663 (F16) TXFD61  
664 (F15) TXFD55  
665 (F14) TXFD50  
666 (F13) TXFD44  
667 (F12) TXFD38  
668 (F11) TXFD32  
669 (F10) TXFD27  
701 (AH14) VDDQ  
702 (AH15) GND  
703 (AH16) VDD  
704 (AH17) GND  
705 (AH18) GND  
706 (AH19) VDD  
707 (AH20) GND  
708 (AH21) VDDQ  
709 (AH22) GND  
710 (AH23) VDD  
711 (AH24) GND  
712 (AH25) VDDQ  
713 (AH26) GND  
714 (AH27) VDD  
715 (AH28) GND  
716 (AG28) VDD  
717 (AF28) GND  
718 (AE28) VDDQ  
719 (AD28) GND  
720 (AC28) VDD  
721 (AB28) GND  
722 (AA28) VDDQ  
723 (Y28) GND  
724 (W28) VDD  
725 (V28) VDDQ  
726 (U28) GND  
727 (T28) VDD  
728 (R28) GND  
729 (P28) VDDQ  
730 (N28) GND  
731 (M28) VDD  
732 (L28) GND  
733 (K28) VDDQ  
734 (J28) GND  
735 (H28) VDD  
736 (G28) GND  
737 (G27) VDD  
738 (G26) GND  
739 (G25) VDDQ  
740 (G24) GND  
741 (G23) VDD  
742 (G22) GND  
743 (G21) VDDQ  
744 (G20) GND  
745 (G19) VDD  
746 (G18) GND  
747 (G17) GND  
748 (G16) VDD  
749 (G15) GND  
750 (G14) VDDQ  
751 (G13) GND  
752 (G12) VDD  
753 (G11) GND  
754 (G10) VDDQ  
755 (G9)  
756 (G8)  
GND  
VDD  
670 (F9)  
671 (F8)  
672 (F7)  
673 (G7)  
674 (H7)  
675 (J7)  
676 (K7)  
677 (L7)  
678 (M7)  
679 (N7)  
680 (P7)  
681 (R7)  
682 (T7)  
683 (U7)  
684 (V7)  
685 (W7)  
686 (Y7)  
TXFD21  
TXFD16  
TXFD10  
GND  
VDD  
GND  
VDDQ  
GND  
VDD  
GND  
VDDQ  
GND  
VDD  
GND  
VDDQ  
VDD  
GND  
635 (AA29) TX_ER5  
636 (Y29) TXD50  
637 (W29) HD7  
638 (V29) HD13  
639 (U29) HD19  
687 (AA7) VDDQ  
688 (AB7) GND  
689 (AC7) VDD  
690 (AD7) GND  
691 (AE7) VDDQ  
692 (AF7) GND  
693 (AG7) VDD  
694 (AH7) GND  
695 (AH8) VDD  
696 (AH9) GND  
697 (AH10) VDDQ  
698 (AH11) GND  
699 (AH12) VDD  
700 (AH13) GND  
640 (T29) HD25  
641 (R29) HD31  
642 (P29) RXD63  
643 (N29) RX_ER6  
644 (M29) TX_CLK6  
645 (L29) TXD62  
646 (K29) RXD70  
647 (J29) RXD73  
648 (H29) RX_DV7  
649 (G29) TX_CLK7  
650 (F29) TXFD124  
16  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 1 OVERVIEW  
1.4 Internal Block Diagram  
TBI  
GMII  
MII  
PORT #7  
PORT #6  
×8  
PORT #5  
PORT #4  
PORT #3  
PORT #2  
PORT #1  
PORT #0  
FIFO data  
Tx FIFO  
Rx FIFO  
FIFO  
common  
10M/100M/1G  
MAC  
data  
bus  
interface  
bus  
Register set/statistics counter  
MII  
serial  
CPU bus  
interface  
CPU  
bus  
management  
MII management interface  
TEST  
port  
JTAG  
1.5 Sample System Configuration  
Control Module  
CPU  
Memory  
Line Interface Module  
(LIM)  
Address Search  
10/100/1000M  
Multi-MAC  
µ
PD98421  
Optical  
Module  
Switch  
Chip  
10/100/1000M  
Multi-PHY  
Forwarding  
Engine  
µ
PD98433  
Line Interface Module  
(LIM)  
Address Search  
10/100M  
Multi-MAC  
µ
PD98421  
10/100M  
Multi-PHY  
Switch  
Chip  
Optical  
Module  
Forwarding  
Engine  
LIM  
PD98431  
µ
Switching  
Module  
17  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS  
(1) Register interface  
Pin Name  
HCS#  
Pin No.  
I/O  
Function  
388  
147  
Input  
Chip select  
When this signal is low level, registers within the chip can be accessed.  
HRW  
Input  
Host read/write  
This is used when the host system accesses the register bus. A read access  
is executed when high level is input to this pin; a write access is executed  
when a low level is input.  
HA[10:0]  
273, 150, 19,  
593, 494, 387,  
272, 149, 18,  
592, 493  
Input  
Register address  
When accessing a register within the µPD984330, addresses needed to  
select the port and register for access are given to HA[10:0]. The µPD98433  
has a 32-bit wide register for each port. HA[10:8] specifies the port and  
HA[7:0] specifies the register address.  
The relationship between HA[10:8] and port numbers is as follows.  
Port 0 HA[10:8] = 000B  
Port 1 HA[10:8] = 001B  
Port 2 HA[10:8] = 010B  
Port 3 HA[10:8] = 011B  
Port 4 HA[10:8] = 100B  
Port 5 HA[10:8] = 101B  
Port 6 HA[10:8] = 110B  
Port 7 HA[10:8] = 111B  
HD[31:0]  
641, 85, 212, 331,  
442, 545, 640, 84,  
211, 330, 441, 544,  
639, 83, 210, 329,  
440, 543, 638, 82,  
209, 328, 439, 542,  
637, 208, 148, 17,  
591, 492, 385, 270  
I/O  
Register data  
3 states  
This is a bidirectional data bus for accessing on-chip registers of the  
µPD98433.  
INT#  
495  
594  
271  
386  
Output  
Open-  
drain  
Interrupt signal  
This is an interrupt request signal. It becomes low level when an interrupt  
occurs. When an interrupt has occurred, this maintains low level until every  
interrupt status is cleared.  
RESET#  
HACK#  
HCLK  
Input  
Hardware reset  
This is an asynchronous reset signal. Immediately after a hardware reset, all  
registers are set to default values and every FIFO and every counter is  
cleared.  
Output  
Register data acknowledge  
3 states  
On a register read operation, this shows that data at HD[31:0] is valid. When  
this signal is low level, data that was read exists at HD[31:0].  
On a register write operation, this shows that the write operation completed.  
Input  
Register interface clock  
This is synchronization clock input for register access. Its maximum  
frequency is 62.5 MHz.  
18  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS  
(2) FIFO interface  
(1/3)  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
I/O  
Function  
RXFCK  
52  
Input  
Receive FIFO bus clock  
This is the reference clock for RXFCKOUT output. Its maximum frequency is  
125 MHz. Give it the same frequency as TXFCK.  
RXFCKOUT  
TXFCK  
316  
115  
Output  
Input  
Receive FIFO bus clock output  
A copy of RXFCK is output. The receive FIFO bus performs receive  
operations in synchronization with RXFCKOUT.  
Transmit FIFO bus clock  
The FIFO bus performs transmit operations in synchronization with TXFCK.  
The maximum frequency is 125 MHz. Give this the same frequency as  
RXFCK.  
RXFEN#  
TXFEN#  
38  
Input  
Input  
FIFO bus receive enable  
When this signal becomes low level, the receive FIFO bus interface is  
enabled and it becomes possible to read from the receive FIFO.  
129  
FIFO bus transmit enable  
When this signal becomes low level, the transmit FIFO bus interface is  
enabled and it becomes possible to write to the transmit FIFO.  
RXFPT[2:0]  
168, 288, 167  
Output  
Receive port number  
3 states  
On a receive FIFO read access, this shows the port number where receive  
data is output.  
The relationship between RXFPT[2:0] and port numbers is shown below.  
Port 0 RXFPT[2:0] = 000B  
Port 1 RXFPT[2:0] = 001B  
Port 2 RXFPT[2:0] = 010B  
Port 3 RXFPT[2:0] = 011B  
Port 4 RXFPT[2:0] = 100B  
Port 5 RXFPT[2:0] = 101B  
Port 6 RXFPT[2:0] = 110B  
Port 7 RXFPT[2:0] = 111B  
TXFPT[2:0]  
253, 371, 254  
Input  
Transmit port number  
On a transmit FIFO write access, this shows the port number of the transmit  
FIFO to which to write transmit data.  
The relationship between TXFPT[2:0] and port numbers is shown below.  
Port 0 TXFPT[2:0] = 000B  
Port 1 TXFPT[2:0] = 001B  
Port 2 TXFPT[2:0] = 010B  
Port 3 TXFPT[2:0] = 011B  
Port 4 TXFPT[2:0] = 100B  
Port 5 TXFPT[2:0] = 101B  
Port 6 TXFPT[2:0] = 110B  
Port 7 TXFPT[2:0] = 111B  
19  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS  
(2/3)  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
I/O  
Function  
TXFD[127:0]  
555, 556, 455, 650, 557, 456, 347,  
230, 651, 558, 457, 348, 231, 106,  
652, 559, 458, 349, 232, 107, 653,  
560, 459, 350, 233, 654, 561, 460,  
351, 234, 109, 655, 562, 352, 235,  
110, 656, 563, 462, 353, 236, 111,  
657, 564, 463, 354, 237, 112, 658,  
565, 464, 355, 238, 113, 659, 566,  
465, 356, 239, 660, 567, 466, 357,  
240, 242, 117, 663, 570, 469, 360,  
243, 118, 664, 571, 470, 361, 244,  
665, 572, 471, 362, 245, 120, 666,  
573, 472, 363, 246, 121, 667, 574,  
473, 364, 247, 122, 668, 575, 365,  
248, 123, 669, 576, 475, 366, 249,  
124, 670, 577, 476, 367, 250, 671,  
578, 477, 368, 251, 126, 672, 579,  
478, 369, 252, 127, 5, 135, 580,  
479, 370  
Input  
Transmit FIFO data bus  
This provides the 128-bit wide data bus of the transmit FIFO  
bus interface.  
RXFD[127:0]  
532, 531, 426 ,627, 530, 425, 312,  
191, 626, 529, 424, 311, 190, 61,  
625, 528, 423, 310, 189, 60, 624,  
527, 422, 309, 188, 623, 526, 421,  
308, 187, 58, 622, 525, 307, 186,  
57, 621, 524, 419, 306, 185, 56,  
620, 523, 418, 305, 184, 55, 619,  
522, 417, 304, 183, 54, 618, 521,  
416, 303, 182, 617, 520, 415, 302,  
181, 179, 50, 614, 517, 412, 299,  
178, 49, 613, 516, 411, 298, 177,  
612, 515, 410, 297, 176, 47, 611,  
514, 409, 296, 175, 46, 610, 513,  
408, 295, 174, 45, 609, 512, 294,  
173, 44, 608, 511, 406, 293, 172,  
43, 607, 510, 405, 292, 171, 606,  
509, 404, 291, 170, 41, 605, 508,  
403, 290, 169, 40, 30, 162, 507,  
402, 289  
Output  
Receive FIFO data bus  
3 states  
This provides the 128-bit wide data bus of the receive FIFO  
bus interface.  
20  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS  
(3/3)  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
I/O  
Function  
RXFDQ[4:0]  
519, 414, 301,  
180, 51  
Output  
Receive data attributes  
3 states  
This shows the attributes of receive data that is on the FIFO bus. On a read  
access of the receive FIFO, it outputs the attributes of receive data that was  
output at RXFD[127:0]. See Table 3-4 for the output patterns of RXFDQ[4:0]  
TXFDQ[4:0]  
TXFBA[7:0]  
568, 467, 358,  
241, 116  
Input  
Transmit data attributes  
This shows the attributes of transmit data that is on the FIFO bus. On a write  
access to the transmit FIFO, it inputs the attributes of transmit data that was  
placed at TXFD[127:0]. See Table 3-3 for the input patterns of TXFDQ[4:0].  
343, 345, 453,  
228, 103, 346,  
229, 104  
Output  
Transmit FIFO buffer available  
3 states  
When this signal is high level, it shows that the space within the transmit  
FIFO for writing transmit data is empty. This signal becomes a low level if the  
amount of data in the transmit FIFO exceeds the value set in the TFWMH  
field of the TFIC1 register.  
A TXFBA signal is established for each port and TXFBA[n] indicates the  
TXFBA signal of port n.  
Output is asynchronous.  
RXFA  
615  
Output  
Receive frame available  
3 states  
When this signal is high level, it shows that at least 1 packet of a receive data  
stream that can be transferred to the host system has been prepared and  
placed in the port shown by RXFPT or that data stored in the receive FIFO  
exceeds the threshold value set in the THRX field of the RFIC3 register.  
PASS  
SKIP  
518  
413  
Input  
Input  
Input  
Receive frame pass  
On a read access from the receive FIFO, this is the signal that is input to  
begin the transfer of receive data of the port that currently is on the FIFO bus.  
Receive frame skip  
On a read access from the receive FIFO, this signal is input to skip the port  
that currently is on the FIFO bus and read from the next port.  
FC[7:0]  
4, 481, 480, 374,  
Flow control frame generation  
372, 255, 130, 258  
This signal designates the transmission of flow control packets by port.  
Besides using register settings for automatically generating them, flow control  
packet transmission can be designated directly using this pin.  
RXPAR  
616  
661  
300  
Output  
Receive parity bit  
3 states  
This shows the parity of 128-bit receive data. Even or odd parity can be  
selected according to the register setting.  
TXPAR  
Input  
Input  
Transmit parity bit  
This shows the parity of 128-bit transmit data. Even or odd parity can be  
selected according to the register setting.  
RXABT  
Receive abort  
This signal designates removing receive FIFO data from within the receive  
FIFO before reading from the receive FIFO interface.  
RXETH[7:0]  
31, 506, 401, 399,  
287, 166, 37, 285  
Output  
Receive FIFO status display  
For each port, this signal is asserted when receive FIFO data exceeds a  
threshold (RXETH field of RFIC3 register).  
21  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS  
(3) Physical layer interface  
(1/5)  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
I/O  
Function  
TX_CLK[7:0]  
649, 644, 325,  
534, 281, 498,  
144, 139  
Input  
MII transmit clock  
This transmit clock input is needed in order to output transmit data to the  
PHY device connected to each port. Each of TXD7[3:0] to TXD0[3:0], which  
is the transmit data from each port, and TX_EN[7:0], which shows that  
transmit data at TXD is valid, and TX_ER[7:0], which shows that an error  
occurred in transmit data at TXD, are output by port in synchronization with  
this clock.  
In MII mode, input a 2.5 MHz clock on 10 Mbps operation and a 25 MHz  
clock on 100 Mbps operation. In this mode, TXD, TX_EN, and TX_ER are  
output in synchronization with the rise of TX_CLK.  
In GMII or TBI mode, fix TX_CLK to high level or low level.  
For unused ports, fix TX_CLK to high level or low level.  
GTX_CLK[7:0]  
340, 446, 79, 201,  
602, 21, 587, 483  
Output  
Transmit clock for 1000M  
This transmit clock is output with the transmit data to the PHY device  
connected to each port. Each of TXD7[3:0] to TXD0[3:0], which is the  
transmit data from each port, and TX_EN[7:0], which shows that transmit  
data at TXD is valid, and TX_ER[7:0], which shows that an error occurred in  
transmit data at TXD, are output by port in synchronization with this clock.  
In GMII mode, this functions as GTX_CLK. In TBI mode, it functions as  
PMA_TX_CLK.  
In MII mode, a clock signal output from this pin.  
In Low Power mode, no clock signal is output from this pin.  
GTX_REF_CLK 447  
Input  
Transmit reference clock  
This reference clock is used for the internal operation and GTX_CLK[7:0]  
production. Always give the clock that the frequency is 125 MHz.  
TXD0[7:0]  
TXD1[7:0]  
TXD2[7:0]  
138, 7, 375, 260,  
Output  
Transmit data (Port 0)  
137, 259, 136, 582  
This is transmit data output for the PHY device of port 0.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to output a nibble (4 bits) of transmit  
data in synchronization with the rising edge of TX_CLK0.  
In GMII or TBI mode, this outputs 8-bit wide transmit data in synchronization  
with the rising edge of GTX_CLK0.  
266, 143, 12, 265,  
142, 11, 141, 10  
Output  
Output  
Transmit data (Port 1)  
This is transmit data output for the PHY device of port 1.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to output a nibble (4 bits) of transmit  
data in synchronization with the rising edge of TX_CLK1.  
In GMII or TBI mode, this outputs 8-bit wide transmit data in synchronization  
with the rising edge of GTX_CLK1.  
390, 497, 596,  
151, 274, 389,  
496, 595  
Transmit data (Port 2)  
This is transmit data output for the PHY device of port 2.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to output a nibble (4 bits) of transmit  
data in synchronization with the rising edge of TX_CLK2.  
In GMII or TBI mode, this outputs 8-bit wide transmit data in synchronization  
with the rising edge of GTX_CLK2.  
22  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS  
(2/5)  
Pin Name  
TXD3[7:0]  
Pin No.  
I/O  
Function  
395, 502, 601,  
394, 501, 600,  
500, 599  
Output  
Output  
Output  
Output  
Output  
Output  
Transmit data (Port 3)  
This is transmit data output for the PHY device of port 3.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to output a nibble (4 bits) of transmit  
data in synchronization with the rising edge of TX_CLK3.  
In GMII or TBI mode, this outputs 8-bit wide transmit data in synchronization  
with the rising edge of GTX_CLK3.  
TXD4[7:0]  
TXD5[7:0]  
TXD6[7:0]  
TXD7[7:0]  
TX_EN[7:0]  
535, 432, 321,  
202, 631, 536,  
537, 632  
Transmit data (Port 4)  
This is transmit data output for the PHY device of port 4.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to output a nibble (4 bits) of transmit  
data in synchronization with the rising edge of TX_CLK4.  
In GMII or TBI mode, this outputs 8-bit wide transmit data in synchronization  
with the rising edge of GTX_CLK4.  
437, 326, 207, 80,  
327, 438, 541, 636  
Transmit data (Port 5)  
This is transmit data output for the PHY device of port 5.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to output a nibble (4 bits) of transmit  
data in synchronization with the rising edge of TX_CLK5.  
In GMII or TBI mode, this outputs 8-bit wide transmit data in synchronization  
with the rising edge of GTX_CLK5.  
89, 550, 336, 217,  
90, 645, 218, 91  
Transmit data (Port 6)  
This is transmit data output for the PHY device of port 6.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to output a nibble (4 bits) of transmit  
data in synchronization with the rising edge of TX_CLK6.  
In GMII or TBI mode, this outputs 8-bit wide transmit data in synchronization  
with the rising edge of GTX_CLK6.  
452, 341, 222,  
342, 223, 96,  
224, 97  
Transmit data (Port 7)  
This is transmit data output for the PHY device of port 7.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to output a nibble (4 bits) of transmit  
data in synchronization with the rising edge of TX_CLK7.  
In GMII or TBI mode, this outputs 8-bit wide transmit data in synchronization  
with the rising edge of GTX_CLK7.  
94, 216, 540, 630,  
280, 275, 381, 261  
Transmit enable/transmit data bit 8  
The function of this signal differs depending on the operation mode.  
(1) In GMII or MII mode  
This signal shows whether or not transmit data (TXD) is valid for each  
port. It is high level from the first data showing the preamble until the last  
data of a transmit frame is output.  
(2) In TBI mode  
This functions as bit 8 of the transmit data of each port (TXD[8]).  
TX_ER[7:0]  
221, 335, 635, 74,  
157, 152, 488, 376  
Output  
MII transmit error/transmit data bit 9  
The function of this signal differs depending on the operation mode.  
(1) In GMII or MII mode  
This signal shows that an error occurred in transmit data at TXD.  
(2) In TBI mode  
This functions as bit 9 of the transmit data of each port (TXD[9]).  
23  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS  
(3/5)  
Pin Name  
Pin No.  
I/O  
Function  
RX_CLK[7:0]0  
339, 334, 78, 200,  
504, 22, 588, 484  
Input  
Receive clock  
This is receive clock input given by a PHY device. Each of RXD7[7:0] to  
RXD0[7:0], which is the receive data from each port, and RX_DV[7:0], which  
shows that receive data at RXD is valid, and RX_ER[7:0], which shows that  
an error occurred in receive data at RXD, are input by port in synchronization  
with this clock.  
In TBI mode, this is a 62.5 MHz clock input pin. In this case, input  
RX_CLKn0 and RX_CLKn1 in an inverse phase relation.  
In GMII or MII mode, input a 125 MHz clock on 1000 Mbps operation, a 25  
MHz clock on 100 Mbps operation, and a 2.5 MHz clock on 10 Mbps  
operation.  
For unused ports, fix RX_CLKn0 to high level or low level.  
RX_CLK[7:0]1  
RXD0[7:0]  
450, 548, 205,  
319, 397, 598,  
14, 583  
Input  
Input  
Receive clock  
To input a 62.5 MHz clock in TBI mode, input the clock in inverse phase to  
RX_CLK[7:0]0.  
378, 485, 584,  
264, 379, 486,  
585, 487  
Receive data (Port 0)  
This is receive data input from the PHY device of port 0.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to input a nibble (4 bits) of receive data  
on the rising edge of RX_CLK00.  
In GMII mode, this inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edge of  
RX_CLK00.  
In TBI mode, it inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edges of RXCLK00  
and RX_CLK01.  
RXD1[7:0]  
RXD2[7:0]  
RXD3[7:0]  
383, 490, 589,  
146, 269, 384,  
491, 590  
Input  
Input  
Input  
Receive data (Port 1)  
This is receive data input from the PHY device of port 1.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to input a nibble (4 bits) of receive data  
on the rising edge of RX_CLK10.  
In GMII mode, this inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edge of  
RX_CLK10.  
In TBI mode, it inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edges of  
RX_CLK10 and RX_CLK11.  
277, 154, 23, 278,  
155, 24, 279, 156  
Receive data (Port 2)  
This is receive data input from the PHY device of port 2.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to input a nibble (4 bits) of receive data  
on the rising edge of RX_CLK20.  
In GMII mode, this inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edge of  
RX_CLK20.  
In TBI mode, it inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edges of  
RX_CLK20 and RX_CLK21.  
28, 398, 283, 160,  
284, 161, 603, 604  
Receive data (Port 3)  
This is receive data input from the PHY device of port 3.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to input a nibble (4 bits) of receive data  
on the rising edge of RX_CLK30.  
In GMII mode, this inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edge of  
RX_CLK30.  
In TBI mode, it inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edges of  
RX_CLK30 and RX_CLK31.  
24  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS  
(4/5)  
Pin Name  
RXD4[7:0]  
Pin No.  
I/O  
Function  
628, 199, 318,  
429, 71, 198,  
317, 70  
Input  
Receive data (Port 4)  
This is receive data input from the PHY device of port 4.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to input a nibble (4 bits) of receive data  
on the rising edge of RX_CLK40.  
In GMII mode, this inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edge of  
RX_CLK40.  
In TBI mode, it inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edges of  
RX_CLK40 and RX_CLK41.  
RXD5[7:0]  
RXD6[7:0]  
RXD7[7:0]  
RX_DV[7:0]  
538, 633, 77, 204,  
323, 433, 322, 203  
Input  
Input  
Input  
Input  
Receive data (Port 5)  
This is receive data input from the PHY device of port 5.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to input a nibble (4 bits) of receive data  
on the rising edge of RX_CLK50.  
In GMII mode, this inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edge of  
RX_CLK50.  
In TBI mode, it inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edges of  
RX_CLK50 and RX_CLK51.  
214, 333, 444,  
547, 642, 213,  
332, 443  
Receive data (Port 6)  
This is receive data input from the PHY device of port 6.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to input a nibble (4 bits) of receive data  
on the rising edge of RX_CLK60.  
In GMII mode, this inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edge of  
RX_CLK60.  
In TBI mode, it inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edges of  
RX_CLK60 and RX_CLK61.  
219, 338, 449,  
552, 647, 448,  
551, 646  
Receive data (Port 7)  
This is receive data input from the PHY device of port 7.  
In MII mode, the lower 4 bits are used to input a nibble (4 bits) of receive data  
on the rising edge of RX_CLK70.  
In GMII mode, this inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edge of  
RX_CLK70.  
In TBI mode, it inputs 8-bit wide receive data on the rising edges of  
RX_CLK70 and RX_CLK71.  
648, 87, 435, 533,  
159, 392, 268, 263  
Receive data valid/receive data bit 8  
The function of this signal differs depending on the operation mode.  
(1) In GMII or MII mode  
When this signal is high level, it shows that data at RXD is valid for each  
port.  
(2) In TBI mode  
This functions as bit 8 of the receive data of each port (RXD[8]).  
For unused ports, fix RX_DV to low level.  
RX_ER[7:0]  
553, 643, 324,  
430, 282, 499,  
145, 140  
Input  
Receive error/receive data bit 9  
The function of this signal differs depending on the operation mode.  
(1) In GMII or MII mode  
This is an input signal for detecting errors that occurred on a PHY device  
while receiving at each port.  
(2) In TBI mode  
This functions as bit 9 of the receive data of each port (RXD[9]).  
For unused ports, fix RX_ER to low level.  
25  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS  
(5/5)  
Pin Name  
CRS[7:0]  
Pin No.  
I/O  
Function  
337, 546, 76, 197,  
505, 25, 16, 586  
Input  
Carrier sense/SIGDET  
The function of this signal differs depending on the operation mode.  
(1) In GMII or MII mode  
This is the carrier sense signal input from the PHY device connected to  
each port.  
(2) In TBI mode  
This functions as SIGDET of each port.  
For unused ports, fix CRS to low level.  
COL[7:0]  
220, 215, 634, 73,  
27, 153, 489, 377  
Input  
Collision  
This is collision signal input detected by the PHY device connected to each  
port.  
For unused ports, fix COL to low level.  
This is not used in TBI mode.  
MDC  
581  
482  
Output  
MII management clock  
This is the MII serial management data transfer clock.  
MDIO  
I/O  
MII management data  
3 states  
This is a bi-directional MII serial management data signal.  
EWRAP[7:0]  
554, 549, 206,  
320, 503, 597,  
13, 8  
Output  
Loopback designation  
This signal designates realization of a loopback configuration for the physical  
layer device on which an externally connected TBI is implemented for each  
port. It is the signal for designating switching the data flow within a physical  
layer device to a loop configuration.  
LINK[7:0]#  
93, 88, 539, 629,  
Output  
Open-  
drain  
LED pins  
158, 276, 267, 262  
These are pins for LEDs that show that a link has been established in TBI  
mode for each port. Output is asynchronous.  
(4) JTAG pins (This function can be supported upon customer request)  
Pin Name  
TMS  
Pin No.  
I/O  
Function  
63  
Input  
JTAG test mode select  
This signal controls a boundary scan state machine.  
The pin is not pulled up internally.  
TDI  
313  
Input  
JTAG test data input  
This signal is the serial data input for a boundary scan.  
The pin is not pulled up internally.  
TDO  
TCK  
193  
192  
Output  
JTAG test data output  
3 states  
This signal is the serial data output for a boundary scan.  
Input  
JTAG test clock  
This is clock input that is used to synchronize test data I/O.  
The pin is not pulled up internally.  
TRST#  
314  
Input  
JTAG reset  
When this signal is made low level, a boundary scan operation is reset.  
This must be high level during a boundary scan operation. It is low level on a  
normal operation.  
The pin is not pulled up internally.  
26  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 2 PIN FUNCTIONS  
(5) Test pins and power supply pins  
Pin Name  
VDD  
Pin No.  
I/O  
Function  
756, 752, 748, 745, 741, 737, 735,  
731, 727, 724, 720, 716, 714, 710,  
706, 703, 699, 695, 693, 689, 685,  
682, 678, 674, 474, 461, 454, 451,  
434, 431, 427, 420, 407, 400, 396,  
393, 380, 373, 128, 119, 114, 105,  
95, 86, 81, 72, 62, 53, 48, 39, 29,  
20, 15, 6  
Power supply (+2.5 V)  
GND  
755, 753, 751, 749, 747, 746, 744,  
742, 740, 738, 736, 734, 732, 730,  
728, 726, 723, 721, 719, 717, 715,  
713, 711, 709, 707, 705, 704, 702,  
700, 698, 696, 694, 692, 690, 688,  
686, 683, 681, 679, 677, 675, 673,  
445, 436, 391, 382, 344, 315, 286,  
257, 256, 227 to 225, 196 to 194,  
165 to 163, 134 to 131, 102 to 98,  
69 to 65, 36 to 32, 3 to 1  
Ground (0 V)  
VDDQ  
754, 750, 743, 739, 733, 729, 725,  
722, 718, 712, 708, 701, 697, 691,  
687, 684, 680, 676, 125, 108, 92,  
75, 59 ,42, 26, 9  
Power supply for I/O buffer for physical layer interface  
This is the power supply for the I/O buffer used for the  
physical layer interface. Supply 3.3 V.  
TEST[3, 1, 0]  
TEST[5, 4, 2]  
359, 468, 569  
Output  
Input  
Test pins  
These are pins for device test. They are not used in normal  
operation.  
428, 64, 662  
Test pins  
These are pins for device test. Always fix these pins to low  
level.  
27  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.1 System Configuration  
The µPD98433 is an 8-port 10/100/1000 Mbps Ethernet Media Access Controller (MAC) that has a wide range of  
operation modes and features. The µPD98433 is a device that was developed for network equipment that requires  
multiple ports, namely LAN switches and routers.  
The µPD98433 supports three interfaces that are compliant with IEEE802.3 as network side interfaces. In GMII  
mode, it provides an interface compatible with a Gigabit Media Independent Interface (GMII). In MII mode, it provides  
an interface compatible with a Media Independent Interface (MII). By connecting PHY devices that are compatible  
with each of GMII and MII, it is possible to realize 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, and 1000 Mbps Ethernets. TBI mode provides  
an interface compatible with the Ten Bit Interface (TBI) that is used in 1000BASE-X.  
The two system side interfaces are a FIFO bus interface and a register bus interface. The FIFO bus interface,  
which is the interface for connecting FIFO within the µPD98433 to the host system, provides a high-speed interface  
that is up to 125 MHz × 128 bits wide on each transmit or receive. There are 6 KB of on-chip FIFO per transmit or  
receive for each port.  
The register bus interface, which is a bus that is used for accessing control registers and statistics counters, is a  
general-purpose bus that does not depend on a specific CPU.  
Figure 3-1. Sample System Configuration Using µPD98433  
ASIC  
Switch  
device  
Quad  
SERDES  
µPD98433  
Quad  
10M/100M/  
1000M  
PHY  
CPU  
8-port switch application  
28  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.2 Function Blocks  
As function blocks, the µPD98433 has an on-chip MAC module, PCS module, SAL module, STAT module, and  
FIFO for each port. It also includes a FIFO bus module, MII management module, and register bus module as  
common modules (see Figure 3-2).  
Figure 3-2. µPD98433 Function Block Diagram  
TXFIFO  
10/100/1000M  
TBI/GMII/MII  
TBI/GMII/MII  
PCS  
MAC  
RXFIFO  
SAL  
STAT  
Port 7  
128-bit bus  
TXFIFO  
RXFIFO  
10/100/1000M  
MAC  
PCS  
FIFO  
bus  
SAL  
STAT  
Port 6  
128-bit bus  
TXFIFO  
RXFIFO  
10/100/1000M  
MAC  
TBI/GMII/MII  
PCS  
SAL  
STAT  
Port 0  
CPU bus  
Test port  
Register bus module  
Management  
interface  
JTAG  
MII management  
3.2.1 MAC module  
A MAC module, which is a block that realizes the 10/100/1000M Ethernet MAC function, is designed so that a PHY  
device that supports GMII or MII can be connected. Connecting a PCS module to a MAC module makes it possible to  
connect to a 1000BASE-X transceiver or receiver that has a TBI interface.  
Within a MAC module, there is an on-chip transmit block, receive block, and MAC control block. The transmit block  
and receive block realize Ethernet transmit and receive operations that conform to IEEE802.3. The MAC control block,  
which is the block that executes flow control, performs the flow control frame receive processing and transmit  
processing defined by IEEE802.3.  
Besides processing data, the MAC module assists later data processing by sending receive operation and transmit  
operation status information to later blocks.  
29  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.2.2 PCS module  
A PCS module, which is a module for realizing a Physical Coding Sublayer function for connecting to a TBI  
interface, is connected to a MAC module on the system side. On the network side of a PCS module, a GMII or MII  
compatible PHY device or a 1000Base-X transceiver can be connected as an external device.  
If a PCS module is set up to connect a GMII/MII compatible PHY device as an external device on the network side,  
the PCS module connects a GMII/MII signal from the MAC module to the external device unchanged. Moreover, if a  
PCS module is set up to connect to an external device using a TBI interface, processing that converts GMII data to  
TBI data is performed in the PCS module. Thus, the PCS modules in the µPD98433 make it possible to configure  
10/100/1000BASE-TX systems through GMII/MII and 1000BASE-X systems using a TBI interface.  
3.2.3 Station Address Logic (SAL) module  
A SAL module detects the value of the destination address field of a receive packet, performs address comparison  
according to preset conditions, and reports the results to a later receive FIFO. The receive FIFO performs receive  
packet selection using address conditions based on the notice from the SAL module.  
Address conditions can be set by address type for each port.  
For a unicast address, the SAL module performs a comparison with the value of the station address register that is  
set in the control register of each port. For a multicast address, it is possible to select between receiving all multicast  
packets and receiving only multicast packets selected using a hash table. For a broadcast address, it is possible to  
set whether or not to receive broadcast packets.  
The µPD98433 also provides settings that make it possible to accept all packets for all address types. See 3.5.5  
Address filtering regarding address filtering conditions.  
3.2.4 Statistics counter (STAT) module  
The µPD98433 provides an effective set of statistics counters for realizing RMON/SNMP for each port. The STAT  
module is the module that realizes this statistics counter set. See 3.12 Statistics Counters regarding statistics  
counters.  
3.2.5 On-chip FIFO  
FIFO, which has on-chip high-speed dual port SRAM, has a capacity of 6 KB per port for transmission and  
reception. FIFO also is responsible for mediation between the send and receive clock from the network side and the  
FIFO bus clock from the host system side.  
3.2.6 FIFO bus module  
The FIFO bus module is a module for the interface between on-chip FIFO and the host system side. A high-speed  
interface of up to 125 MHz × 128 bits per transmit or receive is possible as the bus band.  
3.2.7 MII management module  
The MII management module realizes the MII serial management function specified by IEEE802.3. By using this  
module, the µPD98433 provides a single serial interface for accessing PHY registers using MII management frames  
between external PHY devices. This also is used to access PCS registers using MII management frames to the  
internal PCS module.  
30  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.2.8 Register bus module  
The register bus module provides control registers for performing setup by port or for the entire chip and a register  
bus for accessing statistics counters for each port. The separate 11-bit wide address bus and bidirectional 32-bit wide  
data bus are general-purpose buses not dependent on a specific CPU.  
3.2.9 Operation clocks  
The µPD98433 requires four clocks as operation clocks. These four clocks are a transmit clock and receive clock  
given by a PHY device, a clock for register access, and a clock for performing data transfer from the FIFO bus.  
The transmit block of the MAC module reads transmit data from the transmit FIFO in synchronization with the  
transmit clock input from a PHY device and generates a transmit frame that it outputs to the PHY device. The receive  
block of the MAC module receives a receive frame in synchronization with the receive clock input from a PHY device  
and writes data to the host system in the receive FIFO. A transmit clock and a receive clock of 125 MHz are input for  
1000 Mbps operation, of 25 MHz for 100 Mbps operation, and of 2.5 MHz for 10 Mbps operation. Moreover, the  
receive clock in TBI mode uses dual 62.5 MHz positive and negative clocks.  
The clock for register access is given as a HCLK signal. It can be set in the range from 62.5 MHz to 25 MHz. The  
MDC signal used in the MII management interface is generated by dividing this HCLK.  
The clock for performing FIFO bus data transfer is a TXFCK signal and RXFCKOUT signal. The RXFCK input  
signal is a reference clock for generating the RXFCKOUT signal. In the µPD98433, write operations from the host  
system to on-chip FIFO and read operations from on-chip FIFO to the host system are performed in synchronization  
with the TXFCK input signal and RXFCKOUT output signal, respectively. The TXFCK signal and RXFCK signal both  
can be given in the range from 125 MHz to 50 MHz.  
31  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.3 Frame Formats  
In an Ethernet network, information is transmitted and received in formats known as packets or frames. A frame or  
packet used by Ethernet consist of a preamble (PA), start frame delimiter (SFD), destination address (DA), source  
address (SA), type/length field (TYPE/LEN), data field (DATA), and frame check sequence (FCS) (see Figure 3-3).  
The frame length, which excludes the preamble and SFD, is defined as at least 64 bytes and no more than 1518  
bytes.  
Figure 3-3. Ethernet/IEEE802.3 Frame Structure  
TYPE/  
PA  
7B  
SFD  
1B  
DA  
6B  
SA  
6B  
LEN  
DATA  
FCS  
4B  
2B  
46B to 1500B  
B = bytes  
(1) Preamble and SFD  
The preamble and SFD, which consist of 62 bits of “10” consecutively repeated and “11”, show the head of the  
frame.  
(2) Destination address  
The destination address field, which shows the MAC address of the destination, is a field in which a unicast  
address, multicast address, or broadcast address is written.  
(3) Source address  
The MAC address of the source is written in the source address field.  
(4) Type/length field  
This is used in an Ethernet frame as a field that shows the protocol type. In an IEEE802.3 frame, it is used as  
a length field that shows the length of the data field.  
(5) Data field  
The data field has between 46 bytes and 1500 bytes set.  
(6) Frame check sequence  
The frame check sequence field is used as a 32-bit cyclic redundancy check (CRC) write field for checking  
transfer data.  
In the case of a VLAN frame, the structure differs somewhat from the normal frame structure. A 4-byte VLAN  
header is inserted immediately after the source address field. The µPD98433 has a VLAN frame detection  
function that performs packet processing based on this frame length if a transmit packet or a receive packet is  
detected as a VLAN frame. For details, see 3.11 Operations on VLAN Frames.  
Figure 3-4. VLAN Frame Structure  
PA  
7B  
SFD  
1B  
DA  
6B  
SA  
6B  
TPID  
2B  
TCI  
2B  
LEN  
2B  
DATA  
FCS  
4B  
42B to 1500B  
VLAN header  
B = bytes  
TPID = Tag Protocol ID, TCI = Tag Control Information  
32  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.4 Transmit Operation  
The µPD98433 generates transmit data frames based on data given in the transmit FIFO from a host system. If a  
collision occurs, it executes a backoff algorithm and retransmits the data in the transmit FIFO. Packet status  
information such as the number of transmit bytes and the occurrence of errors is set in the TSVREG register after the  
end of transmission.  
3.4.1 Generation of transmit packets  
The data that a host system writes in the transmit FIFO normally is from the destination address to the last valid  
data in the data field. The preamble, SFD, and FCS that are required as a transmit packet frame can be added  
automatically by the µPD98433.  
(1) Addition of preamble and SFD  
The µPD98433 always outputs transmit data loaded in the transmit FIFO to the network side with a preamble  
and SFD added.  
(2) Addition of CRC  
The µPD98433 automatically calculates the value of CRC and can add it automatically to the FCS field at the  
end of the packet. Whether or not to add this automatically is determined according to specification by the  
TXFDQ signal and the setting of the CRCEN bit of the MACC2 register.  
If CRC addition is specified by the TXFDQ signal, CRC always is added automatically at the end of a transmit  
packet. If CRC addition is not specified by the TXFDQ signal, this depends on the setting of the CRCEN bit of  
the MACC2 register. In this case, CRC is not added automatically if the CRCEN bit is 0 and CRC is added  
automatically if this bit is 1.  
When set so that CRC is not added automatically, the value of the FCS field must be added at the end of the  
transmit data stream written in the transmit FIFO on the host system side.  
CRC added by the higher system is checked by the MAC module, and the result is reflected to the transmit  
status register.  
(3) Addition of PAD  
If the data length of a packet written in the transmit FIFO is not at least the minimum frame length of 64 bytes  
(also 64 bytes for a VLAN frame), the µPD98433 can add PAD automatically to ensure the minimum frame  
length. If the PADEN bit of the MACC2 register was set to 1 or CRC addition was designated by a TXFDQ  
signal, the PAD addition function is enabled. If the PADEN bit of the MACC2 register was set to 1, the correct  
CRC is added automatically by the µPD98433 regardless of specification by the TXFDQ signal or the setting of  
the CRCEN bit.  
33  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.4.2 Start of packet transmission  
A packet transmit operation to the network side is started by either of the following conditions.  
If the amount of data in the transmit FIFO is greater than or equal to a threshold value set in advance  
If an attribute indicating the end of data is given by TXFDQ at the same time as transmit data written in the  
transmit FIFO  
The threshold level for start of transmission is set in the TFDWL field of the TFIC1 register.  
For half-duplex operation, when a transmit operation is started, carrier sense is performed first to check whether or  
not a remote station is transmitting on the network. If no remote station is transferring data and the preset interpacket  
gap expired since the end of the previous data transfer, output of the transmit data stream to the PHY device is begun  
immediately. If a remote station is transferring data, processing waits for the end of its communication and further  
delays the start of transmission until the interpacket gap expires.  
For full-duplex operation, since carrier sense is ignored, transmit data output to the PHY device begins at the time  
that conditions for the start of transmission are satisfied and the interpacket gap expired.  
3.4.3 Setting interpacket gaps  
The µPD98433 requires that an interpacket gap (IPG) be set using a register. There is a Back to Back IPG, which  
is used when transmitting sequentially using a minimum gap width, and a NON Back to Back IPG, which is used  
otherwise.  
(1) Back to Back IPG  
The IPG for back to back transmission is set in the IPGT field of the IPGIFG register. The Back to Back IPG is  
used to transmit sequentially using a minimum gap width after a local transmission. The minimum gap width in  
this case is set in the IPGT field. After the local transmission ends, if the conditions for the start of the next  
transmission are satisfied during this minimum gap time, the µPD98433 regards this as a Back to Back  
transmission. It outputs the next transmit data stream to the PHY device immediately after the IPG time set in  
the IPGT field elapses.  
(2) NON Back to Back IPG  
The NON Back to Back IPG set in the IPGIFG register is used to start transmit data stream output to a PHY  
device after waiting for the IPG time to expire after a remote transmission ends. The NON Back to Back IPG  
consists of two parts. Carrier sense is performed in the first half of the NON Back to Back IPG. If carrier is  
detected during this period, the IPG count is cleared and is started again after waiting for carrier not to be  
detected. If carrier is not detected in the period in which carrier sense is performed, transmit data stream  
output is begun immediately after the IPG period expires.  
In the IPGIFG register, the entire NON Back to Back IPG time is set in the IPGR2 field and the first half carrier  
sense period is set in the IPGR1 field.  
34  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.4.4 Collisions and retransmission  
Except in cases in which there are more collisions than the maximum number of collisions set in the RTMAX field  
of the HDREG register or there are too many collisions in the collision window period set in the COLW field of the  
HDREG register, the µPD98433 retransmits packets automatically when collisions occur. When a collision occurs, it  
suspends transmission of data from the transmit FIFO and begins a jam transmission. The read pointer in the transmit  
FIFO is returned to the head of the transmit data. When jam pattern transmission ends, the µPD98433 waits for  
transmission according to a backoff algorithm. It begins retransmission automatically when the backoff period ends.  
It is a network error if there are more collisions than the maximum number of collisions set in the RTMAX field of  
the HDREG register or there are too many collisions in the collision window period set in the COLW field of the  
HDREG register. If either condition occurs, data remaining in the transmit FIFO of the packet on which the condition  
occurred is cleared and does not affect other transmit packet data that already has been stored. If there were more  
collisions than the maximum number of collisions, the TMXCO bit of the TSVREG register is set to 1. If there were too  
many collisions in the collision window period, the TLCOL bit of the TSVREG register is set to 1.  
The retransmission time interval is determined by the backoff algorithm and the µPD98433 waits for retransmission  
during a random slot time (512-bit time). In this algorithm, the coefficient r of the slot time for which the µPD98433 is  
in a wait state before it retransmits for the nth time is determined by the following expression.  
0 r < 2n If n > 10, let n = 10.  
The constant 10 in the above inequality can be set to equal to or less than 10 arbitrary values by setting the ABEXT  
field of the HDREG register. In this case, set the ABEXE bit of the HDREG register to 1.  
3.4.5 End of transmission and abort  
The µPD98433 ends a transmission or aborts a transmission under the conditions that follow. When a transmission  
abort occurs, data of the aborted packet that remains in the transmit FIFO is cleared. Moreover, if a transmission  
abort occurs on a packet that is being written to the transmit FIFO, all data written to the transmit FIFO after the abort  
occurred is ignored until an end of data is specified by TXFDQ signal input. (See 3.7.1 FIFO bus interface.)  
Whenever a transmission ends or is aborted, status information about the transmit operation that ended is reported  
in the TSVREG register. This status information may also be an interrupt by the INT# signal due to canceling interrupt  
masking by setting the TIMR register.  
(1) Normal termination  
If data transmission completes without any problems, the TDONE bit of the TSVREG register is set to 1 as a  
normal termination.  
(2) More collisions than maximum number of collisions  
If there are more collisions than the maximum number of collisions set in the RTMAX field of the HDREG  
register, the transmit operation is aborted and the TMXCO bit of the TSVREG register is set to 1.  
(3) Occurrence of late collision  
If a collision occurs outside the collision window that is set in the COLW field of the HDREG register, it is  
considered a late collision and the transmit operation is aborted. When a late collision occurs, the TLCOL bit of  
the TSVREG register is set to 1.  
35  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
(4) Excessive transmission delay  
If a transmission cannot be started even after 24288-bit time has elapsed since the µPD98433 tried to start the  
transmission, it is considered excessive delay and the transmission is aborted. When excessive delay occurs,  
the TEDFR bit of the TSVREG register is set to 1.  
(5) Attempt to transmit packet larger than maximum frame length  
If an attempt is made to transmit a packet that has a length exceeding the maximum frame length set in the  
LMAX register, the µPD98433 proceeds with transmission until the packet length reaches the value of the  
LMAX register. If the HUGEN bit of the MACC2 register is set to 1, the limitation of transmit packet length by  
the LMAX register is canceled. If a transmission abort occurs due to this condition, the TGNT bit of the  
TSVREG register is set to 1.  
(6) Occurrence of transmit FIFO underrun  
If all data in the transmit FIFO is transmitted, but does not have time to write that transmit data, the system  
side, the transmit FIFO generates an underrun and aborts the transmit operation. When a transmission is  
aborted due to a transmit FIFO underrun, the TFUN bit of the FSVREG register and the TURUN bit of the  
TSVREG register are immediately set to 1.  
(7) Occurrence of parity errors  
Parity errors are checked between the transmit FIFO and the MAC block. Therefore, even if a parity error  
occurs in the transmit FIFO bus interface, a transmit operation is performed by writing data in the transmit FIFO  
and sending transmit data from the transmit FIFO to the MAC block after the start of transmission. By default,  
transmission is not suspended even if an error occurs in the data transmitted from the transmit FIFO, however  
by setting the DPAR bit of the TFIC2 register to 1, transmission can be suspended at the point at which an  
error occurs. CRC is not added to the suspended transmit packet. In this case, the TPER bit of the FSVREG  
register is set to 1. Also, the TURUN bit of the TSVREG register is set to 1.  
Moreover, by setting the DPAR bit of the TFIC2 register to 0, the µPD98433 also can terminate transmission  
after transmitting data in which a parity error occurs without change as a transmit frame. If automatically  
adding CRC, CRC calculation is performed ignoring parity errors. In that case, the TPER bit of the FSVREG is  
set to 1. The TURUN bit of the TSVREG register does not change.  
(8) Transmit FIFO overrun  
If transmit FIFO overrun occurs, the packet in which the overrun occurred is transmitted up to the word  
preceding the one at which the overrun has occurred, and transmission is aborted. At this time, a transmit  
parity error occurs.  
36  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.5 Receive Operations  
The µPD98433 provides receive data from a receive data stream sent by a PHY device to a host system. The  
µPD98433 performs preamble and SFD detection, length field checking, and CRC checking. By setting the MACC3  
register, status information can be added to the data stream that is output to the host system from the receive FIFO at  
the same time that the number of receive bytes, occurrence of errors, and other status information for each receive  
packet is set in the RSVREG register after an end of receive. It also is possible to set up packet filtering by address or  
other conditions.  
3.5.1 Preamble and SFD detection  
In GMII or MII mode, each port recognizes data on a RXDn signal as receive data when the RX_DVn signal is high  
level. In TBI mode, it recognizes receive data when a valid code appears on 10-bit receive data. When each port has  
detected the preamble pattern (1,0,1,0,...) from the data that was received, it waits until SFD (1,0,1,0,1,0,1,1) is  
detected at its end. When SFD is detected, it recognizes the beginning of a receive packet and starts storing data in  
the receive FIFO. The preamble and SFD are removed from the receive packet and are not stored in the receive  
FIFO.  
3.5.2 Length field check  
Each port of the µPD98433 counts the length of a receive packet and checks the data field length by considering  
the two bytes following the source address field the length field. For a packet considered a VLAN frame, the two bytes  
following the VLAN header are considered the length field. See 3.11.1 VLAN frame detection regarding VLAN frame  
detection. The results of checking are reported to the host system as status information.  
3.5.3 CRC check  
Each port of the µPD98433 automatically calculates a 4-byte frame check sequence (FCS) from receive packet  
data and compares it to the CRC data added to the end of the receive packet. The comparison result is reported to  
the host system as status information.  
3.5.4 Packet filtering  
The µPD98433 can perform receive packet filtering using the following conditions. Filtering can be set for each  
port. Filtering conditions also can be used in combination.  
Destination address  
Short packets: Packets whose packet length is less than 64 bytes  
CRC error packets  
Control frames  
Packet containing dribble nibble  
The µPD98433 rejects the receive packets with following conditions compulsorily.  
Packets whose packet length is equal to or less than 16 bytes  
Packets whose inter-frame gap is shorter than MINIFG  
See 3.5.5 Address filtering for a procedure that performs packet filtering using destination address conditions.  
Filtering against CRC error packets, control frames, short packets, and dribble nibbles can be set using the RFIC2  
register. By setting this register, packets on which CRC errors occurred, control frames, short packets, and dribble  
nibbles can be removed from the receive FIFO. All filtering conditions can be canceled, and canceling all of them  
transfers all received packets to the host system.  
37  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.5.5 Address filtering  
The µPD98433 can execute filtering by receive packet destination address and remove receive packets that do not  
meet conditions. Address filtering conditions are set using the AFR, HT1, HT2, LSA1, and LSA2 registers. Filtering  
conditions can be set by the address types unicast address, multicast address, and broadcast address. These filtering  
conditions can also be combined.  
(1) Unicast address filtering  
Setting the AUC bit of the AFR register to 0 makes the station address that is set in the LSA1 register and  
LSA2 register a unicast address and compares it to the destination address of a receive packet. If the  
compared addresses match, the receive packet is stored in the receive FIFO. Setting the AUC bit of the AFR  
register to 1 stores all unicast packets in the receive FIFO.  
(2) Multicast address filtering  
There are two ways of filtering multicast addresses. Setting the PRM bit of the AFR register to 1 stores all  
multicast packets in the receive FIFO.  
Setting the AMC bit of the AFR register to 1 uses the hash table provided by the HT1 register and HT2 register  
and stores only multicast packets that match the table in the receive FIFO. The method of detecting matches  
using the hash table is as follows.  
The hash table is referenced by calculating the CRC of a received multicast address and using bits 28 to 23 of  
the resulting 32-bit CRC. The following expression is used as a polynomial in CRC calculation.  
X32 + X26 + X23 + X22 + X16 + X12 + X11 + X10 + X8 + X7 + X5 + X4 + X2 + X + 1  
If bit positions in the six bits above are set to 1 in the HT1 register and HT2 register, the multicast packet is  
stored in the receive FIFO. In order to set a hash table, multicast address CRC calculations must be  
performed and the corresponding bits must be set to 1.  
(3) Broadcast address filtering  
Setting the ABC bit of the AFR register to 1 stores broadcast packets in the receive FIFO.  
(4) Promiscuous mode  
Setting the PRO bit of the AFR register to 1 makes the mode promiscuous and stores packets of all address  
types in the receive FIFO.  
3.5.6 Receive FIFO overflow  
If an overflow occurs in the receive FIFO while storing receive packets, data storage stops immediately.  
The packet that causes receive FIFO overflow is treated according to the following conditions:  
(a) If RXFA threshold value control by the THRX field of the RFIC3 register is not used, the packet is rejected.  
(b) If RXFA threshold value control is used, and fewer than 48 bytes of the packet were written in the receive FIFO  
when the receive FIFO overflowed, the packet is rejected.  
(c) If RXFA threshold value control is used, and at least 48 bytes of the packet were written in the receive FIFO  
when the receive FIFO overflowed, the packet reception is suspended. The part of the packet already received  
is output with RXFDQ. RXFDQ which indicates EOF and failure is added to the last received word.  
It is possible for a host system to detect overflow using the FSVREG register.  
38  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.5.7 Clearing receive FIFO  
A host system can clear the contents of receive FIFO by setting the RXFFLH bit of the MACC3 register to 1. If this  
bit is set in the middle of storing a receive packet in receive FIFO, the packet being received is discarded. If a  
previous receive packet already is stored in the receive FIFO at that time, that packet also is cleared.  
3.5.8 Adding status information  
The µPD98433 can add status information to the beginning or end of receive packet data via the receive FIFO  
interface. Setting the APSS bit of the MACC3 register or the APSE bit of the MACC3 register to 1 adds status and  
RBYT fields to the beginning or the end of the receive data, respectively. Figure 3-5 shows the configuration of the  
status and RBYT fields that is displayed when read.  
Receive status information outputs the contents of Table 3-1 and the RBYT field outputs the contents of Table 3-2.  
The UFCR field displays the contents of the UFCR register.  
APSE and APSS cannot be set to 1 simultaneously. Set either one to 1 or set both of them to 0. The APSS setting  
cannot be used when receiving a Jumbo frame or reading receive data when one packet of data had not been  
completely received according to the setting of the THRX threshold value in the RFIC3 register, since status  
information cannot be requested.  
Figure 3-5. Configuration of Status and RBYT Fields  
127  
111  
95  
126  
110  
94  
125  
109  
93  
124  
108  
92  
123  
107  
91  
122  
106  
90  
121  
105  
89  
73  
57  
41  
25  
9
120  
119  
103  
118  
102  
86  
70  
54  
38  
22  
6
117  
101  
85  
69  
53  
37  
21  
5
116  
100  
84  
68  
52  
36  
20  
4
115  
99  
83  
67  
51  
35  
19  
3
114  
98  
82  
66  
50  
34  
18  
2
113  
97  
81  
65  
49  
33  
17  
1
112  
96  
80  
64  
48  
32  
16  
0
Reserved  
104  
Reserved  
88  
87  
UFCR[31:16]  
79  
78  
77  
76  
75  
74  
72  
71  
UFCR[15:0]  
63  
62  
61  
60  
59  
58  
56  
55  
RBYT [31:16]  
47  
46  
45  
44  
43  
42  
40  
39  
RBYT [15:0]  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
24  
23  
RSV[31:16]  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
8
7
RSV[15:0]  
39  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
Table 3-1. Receive Status Information  
Bit  
Field  
RFOV  
Function Description  
31  
Receive FIFO overflow  
Indicates that this is a packet for which reception was suspended because it made the receive FIFO  
overflow.  
14  
13  
VLAN  
USOP  
VLAN frame  
Indicates that the length/type field of the frame contains the VLAN protocol identifier 8100H.  
Control frame containing undefined opcode received  
Indicates that the current frame was recognized as a control frame by the MAC module but that it  
contains an unknown opcode.  
12  
11  
10  
RPCF  
RCFR  
DBNB  
Pause control frame received  
Indicates that the current frame was recognized as a control frame that contains a valid pause  
frame opcode and a valid destination address according to the MAC module.  
Control frame received  
Indicates that the current frame was recognized as having a valid type field as a control frame  
according to the MAC module.  
Packet containing dribble nibble received  
Indicates that a fractional 4 bits was received after the end of a packet.  
A single nibble (called a dribble nibble) occurred, but was not transmitted to the system (10/100  
Mbps only).  
9
8
7
6
5
RBRO  
RMUL  
ROK  
Broadcast packet received  
Indicates that the destination address of the packet contained a broadcast address.  
Multicast packet received  
Indicates that the destination address of the packet contained a multicast address.  
Receive OK  
Indicates that the frame contains a valid CRC and had no code errors.  
RLOR  
RLER  
Length field check  
Indicates that the length/frame type field is greater than 1500.  
Data length mismatch  
Indicates that the length/type field value in the packet does not match the actual byte length of the  
data. If the length/type field value is greater than 1500, less than 46 (not VLAN), or less than 42  
(VLAN), this status is invalid.  
4
3
2
RCRCE  
RCV  
CRC error  
Indicates that the CRC of the packet did not match the internally generated CRC.  
Receive code error  
Indicates that at least 1 nibble was detected as a code error while receiving the packet.  
RFCANote  
Illegal carrier detected  
Indicates that the following was input and a valid packet could not be recognized.  
In MII mode, RX_ER = 1, RX_DV = 0, RXD[3:0] = EH  
In GMII mode, RX_ER = 1, RX_DV = 0, RXD[7:0] = 0EH  
In TBI mode, the next code after an IDLE code was not an IDLE or SPD.  
REPSNote  
1
0
Invalid packet received  
Indicates that the received packet ended at the SFD field and a valid packet could not be  
recognized.  
RPPDNote  
Receive packet ignored  
Indicates that IFG during reception is shorter than the value set to the MINIFG field of the IPGIFG  
register and the packet received is not recognized as a valid packet. The IFG is counted from the  
end of the frame until the beginning of the next frame.  
Note The status in RSV[2:0] is reported when the next valid packet is received.  
40  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
Table 3-2. RBYT Field  
Bit  
31:0  
Field  
RBYT  
Function Description  
Receive byte count  
This shows the total number of bytes in a frame.  
3.6 Full-Duplex Operation  
Each port of the µPD98433 is capable of full-duplex operation that transmits and receives packets simultaneously.  
Setting the FULLD bit of the MACC2 register to 1 enables full-duplex operation. When full-duplex operation is  
enabled, the COLn signal and CRSn signal are ignored. In TBI mode, the CRSn signal functions as SIGDET.  
41  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.7 System Bus Interface  
The µPD98433 has an on-chip FIFO bus interface and register bus interface for interfacing with a host system. The  
FIFO bus interface is used to transfer transmit and receive data between on-chip FIFO and a host system. The  
register bus interface is used to access the internal registers and statistics counters of the µPD98433.  
3.7.1 FIFO bus interface  
The µPD98433 has a 128-bit wide transmit FIFO bus for giving transmit data to transmit FIFO and a 128-bit wide  
receive FIFO bus that reads receive data from receive FIFO.  
A bus cycle of up to 125 MHz can be used to transfer data in the FIFO bus interface.  
(1) Transmit FIFO bus interface operations  
Figure 3-6. FIFO Interface Write Timing  
TXFCK  
TXFEN#  
TXFBA[N]  
TXFDQ[4]  
TXFDQ[3]  
TXFDQ[2]  
TXFDQ[1]  
TXFDQ[0]  
TXFPT[2:0]  
TXFD[127:0]  
TXPAR  
Port enable  
1st word  
128 bits  
2nd word  
3rd word  
128 bits  
4th word  
128 bits  
n
th word  
24 bits  
n
2
th word  
n
1
th word  
128 bits  
128 bits  
128 bits  
3 byte  
ending  
Idle  
Start  
Middle  
Idle  
A data write to transmit FIFO is enabled by making the TXFEN# signal low level. When this signal is asserted,  
the TXFBAn signal functions of all ports are enabled. Each port makes the TXFBAn signal high level if the data  
stored in transmit FIFO does not exceed the value set in the TFWMH field of the TFIC1 register. This makes it  
possible for the host system to recognize that at least the preset amount of free space was reserved in the  
transmit FIFO for each port.  
When it is confirmed that the TXFBAn signal is high level, the host system begins writing transmit data. The  
host system provides the necessary data in TXFPT[2:0], TXFD[127:0], and TXFDQ[4:0].  
42  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
TXFPT[2:0] is a signal for specifying the port number of the port that performs a packet transmission. The host  
system uses this pin to give the port number of the transmit FIFO to be written. TXFD[127:0] is the data bus for  
writing to transmit FIFO. TXFDQ[4:0] is a signal for showing attributes of the data on the FIFO data bus. The  
host uses this to input attributes of the data at TXFD[127:0] that correspond to each bus mode.  
Data attributes are idle, start of data, middle of data, and end of data. If a fraction appears at the end of data,  
the µPD98433 is notified that fraction processing according to the data attribute is needed. It also is possible  
to designate the automatic addition of CRC codes by setting these attributes. Table 3-3 shows the relationship  
between TXFDQ[4:0] input and data attributes.  
Table 3-3. TXFDQ Pins and Transmit Data Attributes  
TXFDQ  
Meaning  
Valid Data  
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
X
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
X
X
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
X
X
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Big Endian  
Little Endian  
Idle  
None  
None  
Start of data  
FEDCBA9876543210  
FEDCBA9876543210  
FEDCBA9876543210  
None  
FEDCBA9876543210  
FEDCBA9876543210  
FEDCBA9876543210  
None  
Middle of data  
Start of data (CRC addition)  
Reserved  
Reserved  
None  
None  
End of data (EOF) 16B  
End of data (EOF) 1B  
End of data (EOF) 2B  
End of data (EOF) 3B  
End of data (EOF) 4B  
End of data (EOF) 5B  
End of data (EOF) 6B  
End of data (EOF) 7B  
End of data (EOF) 8B  
End of data (EOF) 9B  
End of data (EOF) 10B  
End of data (EOF) 11B  
End of data (EOF) 12B  
End of data (EOF) 13B  
End of data (EOF) 14B  
End of data (EOF) 15B  
FEDCBA9876543210  
F
FEDCBA9876543210  
0
FE  
10  
FED  
210  
FEDC  
3210  
FEDCB  
43210  
FEDCBA  
543210  
FEDCBA9  
6543210  
FEDCBA98  
FEDCBA987  
FEDCBA9876  
FEDCBA98765  
FEDCBA987654  
FEDCBA9876543  
FEDCBA98765432  
FEDCBA987654321  
76543210  
876543210  
9876543210  
A9876543210  
BA9876543210  
CBA9876543210  
DCBA9876543210  
EDCBA9876543210  
See 3.7.1 (3) Little endian/Big endian regarding little endian and big endian.  
Once the start of data is written, the remaining data is written to the transmit FIFO using burst transfer.  
When the amount of data in transmit FIFO exceeds the value set in the TFDWL field of the TFIC1 register, the  
transfer of transmit data to the MAC module begins. Moreover, if the amount of data in transmit FIFO exceeds  
the value set in the TFWMH field of the TFIC1 register, the TXFBAn signal is made low level. By designating  
an idle during burst transfer, it is possible to delay writing to transmit FIFO.  
43  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
By switching TXFPT[2:0] while writing to transmit FIFO, it is possible to continue writing transmit data to the  
transmit FIFO of another port. In this case, it is possible to write to another port after a rise of TXFCK  
immediately after switching, but it must be confirmed that the TXFBA signal corresponding to the other port is  
at high level. Moreover, a data stream that is newly written to another port can begin at data having any of the  
attributes start of data, middle of data, or end of data and transmit packets can be written continuously to each  
port divided into blocks. However, whenever the port is switched, the attribute of the write data must be given  
correctly. Figure 3-7 shows an example of the timing of switching the port for writing transmit data using  
TXFPT[2:0].  
Figure 3-7. Timing of Switching Transmit Data Write Port Using TXFPT[2:0]  
TXFCK  
TXFEN#  
TXFBA[N]  
TXFBA[M]  
TXFDQ[4]  
TXFDQ[3]  
TXFDQ[2]  
TXFDQ[1]  
TXFDQ[0]  
TXFPT[2:0]  
TXFD[127:0]  
TXPAR  
Port enable M  
Port enable N  
1st word  
128 bits  
2nd word  
128 bits  
3rd word  
128 bits  
4th word  
128 bits  
1st word  
128 bits  
2nd word  
128 bits  
3rd word  
128 bits  
4th word  
128 bits  
5th word  
128 bits  
Port N  
Middle  
Port M  
Start  
Start  
Middle  
Idle  
While writing data to transmit FIFO, if something that causes transmission to abort (such as excessive  
collisions or delay) occurs in the transmit packet that is being written, the portion of the data of the transmit  
packet currently being written that already has been stored in transmit FIFO is cleared. Furthermore, data  
written after the abort occurs is ignored until data that has an attribute indicating the end of data (EOF) is given  
in the TXFDQ pin. The next packet can be written after the host system inputs an EOF.  
Moreover, while writing data to transmit FIFO, if something that causes transmission to abort occurs in a  
transmit packet that is waiting for a transmission that already was being stored in transmit FIFO, the  
transmission is cut off and the rest of the relevant packets in the transmit FIFO are cleared. This has no affect  
on other packet data stored in the transmit FIFO or packet data currently being written.  
44  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
(2) Receive FIFO bus interface operations  
Figure 3-8. FIFO Interface Read Timing  
RXFCKOUT  
RXFEN#  
RXFA  
RXFDQ[4]  
RXFDQ[3]  
RXFDQ[2]  
RXFDQ[1]  
RXFDQ[0]  
RXFPT[2:0]  
RXFD[127:0]  
RXPAR  
Port number  
2nd word  
3rd word  
n
1
th word  
n
th word  
1st word 128 bits  
PASS  
SKIP  
3 byte  
ending  
Idle  
Start  
Middle  
Idle  
In the µPD98433, either a complete packet is stored in receive FIFO on a receive from the network side or the  
data stored in receive FIFO can be transferred to the host system when that data exceeds the threshold value  
set in the THRX field of the RFIC3 register. The following procedure reads from receive FIFO.  
(a) Reading from receive FIFO  
Reading data from receive FIFO is enabled by making the RXFEN# signal low level. In the µPD98433, the  
port number of the receive FIFO that is read via the FIFO bus interface is designated from the µPD98433  
side. When reading from receive FIFO is enabled, the µPD98433 first scans the receive FIFO of each port  
and checks whether or not a complete packet of receive data is stored in the receive FIFO of any port or  
checks whether or not the threshold value set in the THRX field of the RFIC3 register has been exceeded.  
As a result, if at least one complete packet is stored in any receive FIFO or the threshold value set in the  
THRX field of the RFIC3 register is exceeded, it makes the RXFA signal high level to notify the host system  
that receive data is prepared for transfer. At the same time, it outputs the port number of the receive FIFO  
in which data is prepared for transfer at RXFPT[2:0]. After the host system recognizes RXFPT[2:0], it must  
input a PASS signal in order to read data from the receive FIFO of the port. When the PASS signal is  
input, receive data is read from RXFD[128:0] in burst form as a receive data stream synchronized with  
RXFCKOUT.  
At the same time that receive data is read, the µPD98433 outputs data attributes on the FIFO data bus  
corresponding to each bus mode in the RXFDQ signal. If there are fractional bytes at the end of receive  
data, the valid byte positions can be known from the data attribute. Table 3-4 shows the relationship  
between RXFDQ[4:0] output and data attributes.  
45  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
Table 3-4. RXFDQ Pins and Receive Data Attributes  
RXFDQ  
Meaning  
Valid Data  
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
X
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
X
0
1
0
1
X
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Big Endian  
Little Endian  
Idle  
None  
None  
Start of data  
Middle of data  
Reserved  
FEDCBA9876543210  
FEDCBA9876543210  
None  
FEDCBA9876543210  
FEDCBA9876543210  
None  
Status information (Beginning) FEDCBA9876543210  
FEDCBA9876543210  
FEDCBA9876543210  
None  
Status information (End)  
Reserved  
FEDCBA9876543210  
None  
Fail (EOF)  
Error  
Error  
Fail (SFD)  
Error  
Error  
Fail (Middle of frame)  
Reserved  
Error  
Error  
None  
None  
Reserved  
None  
None  
End of data (EOF) 16B  
End of data (EOF) 1B  
End of data (EOF) 2B  
End of data (EOF) 3B  
End of data (EOF) 4B  
End of data (EOF) 5B  
End of data (EOF) 6B  
End of data (EOF) 7B  
End of data (EOF) 8B  
End of data (EOF) 9B  
End of data (EOF) 10B  
End of data (EOF) 11B  
End of data (EOF) 12B  
End of data (EOF) 13B  
End of data (EOF) 14B  
End of data (EOF) 15B  
FEDCBA9876543210  
F
FEDCBA9876543210  
0
FE  
10  
FED  
210  
FEDC  
3210  
FEDCB  
43210  
FEDCBA  
543210  
FEDCBA9  
FEDCBA98  
FEDCBA987  
FEDCBA9876  
FEDCBA98765  
FEDCBA987654  
FEDCBA9876543  
FEDCBA98765432  
FEDCBA987654321  
6543210  
76543210  
876543210  
9876543210  
A9876543210  
BA9876543210  
CBA9876543210  
DCBA9876543210  
EDCBA9876543210  
See 3.5.8 Adding status information regarding the addition of status information. See 3.7.1 (3) Little  
endian/Big endian regarding little endian and big endian.  
If a read of one packet from the port specified in RXFPT ends and there is a port in which the next receive  
data is prepared for reading, the µPD98433 makes the RXFA signal high level, outputs the port number in  
RXFPT, and waits for the next receive data read.  
The RXFA signal maintains high level if there is receive data that has been prepared for reading in the port  
shown in RXFPT. As an exception, the RXFA signal always becomes low level once there is a shift to  
another port due to skip signal input while reading.  
46  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
The order of ports when performing receive data transfer is determined in advance in the µPD98433. The  
sequence Port 0 Port 1 Port 2 ... Port 7 Port 0 ... is repeated. However, on a shift to the next  
port, if a complete packet of receive data has not been stored in that port and the threshold value set in the  
THRX field of the RFIC3 register is not exceeded, the port is skipped and its turn goes to the next port.  
Figure 3-9 shows the timing after a read of receive data from a given port is completed until a read of the  
next port is started.  
Figure 3-9. Timing of Switching Ports After Receive Data Is Read  
RXFCKOUT  
RXFEN#  
RXFA  
RXFDQ[4]  
RXFDQ[3]  
RXFDQ[2]  
RXFDQ[1]  
RXFDQ[0]  
RXFPT[2:0]  
Port number  
Port number  
n
3
th word  
n
2
th word  
2nd word  
3rd word  
n
1
th word  
n
th 24 bits  
RXFD[127:0]  
1st word  
RXPAR  
PASS  
SKIP  
3 byte  
ending  
Middle  
Idle  
Start  
Middle  
Filtering conditions can be set for receive data written in receive FIFO from the network side by using  
register settings. If registers are set so that packets containing CRC errors, control frames, short packets,  
or dribble nibbles are not received, those packets are at first stored in receive FIFO. However, when CRC  
errors and the like are confirmed, those stored in receive FIFO are cleared and the host system is not  
notified that the packets were stored. Similarly, in the case of address filtering, packets that do not satisfy  
filtering conditions are removed from receive FIFO and are not transferred to the host system.  
If receive FIFO overflows, the packet being received is at first written to receive FIFO. However, after  
overflow is detected, data of the packet being received that already was stored in receive FIFO is cleared  
and data similarly is not transferred to the host system.  
If data whose data length is less than 16 bytes is stored in receive FIFO from the network side, the receive  
FIFO unconditionally deletes the data.  
47  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
(b) SKIP signal  
The port number of the receive FIFO whose data is read via the FIFO bus is designated by the µPD98433.  
However, if a SKIP signal is input when the reading of receive FIFO is enabled and the RXFA signal is high  
level or in the middle of reading receive data using burst transfer, the host system can read a port other  
than the one the µPD98433 specifies.  
As previously stated, the order in which receive data is transferred for each port is determined in advance  
by the µPD98433 and the SKIP signal is used to forcibly shift to reading receive data from the next port in  
the sequence by host system designation.  
When a SKIP signal is input, the µPD98433 suspends reading receive data of the current port, outputs  
00000B to the RXFDQ pin, and becomes idle. The RXFA signal at first becomes low level. Next, the  
µPD98433 outputs the number of the next port that is prepared to transfer receive data to the host system  
in RXFPT and makes the RXFA signal high level again. After that, input of a PASS signal by the host  
system starts a data read from the new port.  
The data of a port skipped due to a SKIP signal is maintained. When its own turn recurs due to receive  
data of other ports having been read or the input of a new SKIP signal, the skipped port waits for the input  
of a new PASS signal and begins transferring the remaining receive data.  
Figure 3-10 shows an example of the timing when switching ports due to a SKIP signal before read begins.  
In this case, the port is switched two clocks of RXFCKOUT after detecting the SKIP signal.  
Do not give a SKIP signal the width of multiple clocks. To input a SKIP signal multiple times and skip ports  
consecutively, do it so that the next SKIP signal is input after confirming a port switch after input of a 1-  
clock SKIP signal.  
Figure 3-10. Timing of Switching Read Port Due to SKIP Signal (Before Start of Read)  
RXFCKOUT  
RXFEN#  
RXFA  
RXFDQ[4]  
RXFDQ[3]  
RXFDQ[2]  
RXFDQ[1]  
RXFDQ[0]  
RXFPT[2:0]  
RXFD[127:0]  
RXPAR  
Port number N  
Port number N+1  
XX  
XX  
2nd word  
1st word  
1st word  
PASS  
SKIP  
Skip frame  
Start  
Middle  
Idle  
48  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
Next, Figure 3-11 shows an example of the timing when switching ports due to a SKIP signal while reading.  
In this case, the port switches two clocks of RXFCKOUT after the SKIP signal is detected. The µPD98433  
outputs valid receive data for two clocks until the port switches. If the same port as the port skipped due to  
the SKIP signal continues to be read (if there is no receive data that can be read in other ports), the  
original port is shown in RXFPT[2:0] a further two clocks after the two clocks of valid data (see Figure 3-11  
(b)). Since the µPD98433 is in IDLE state at the time that the next port is shown after SKIP signal input, a  
PASS signal must be input in order to start reading.  
When it is again the turn of a port that was skipped due to a SKIP signal, data output starts from the next  
data after the receive data that was output last when it was last skipped. These operations make it  
possible to use the SKIP signal to read data received by each port divided into blocks. The read unit is  
determined in advance and a SKIP signal is input for each read unit until an end of data appears in the  
RXFDQ signal. Thus it is possible to continuously read sequentially from each port by read unit. However,  
unlike writing to transmit FIFO, the µPD98433 side specifies the port that is read.  
Do not give a SKIP signal the width of multiple clocks. To input a SKIP signal multiple times to  
consecutively skip ports, do it so that the next SKIP signal is input after confirming that a port was skipped  
after input of a 1-clock SKIP signal.  
Figure 3-11. Timing of Read Port Switch Due to SKIP Signal (During Read) (1/2)  
(a) Skipped port and next port are different  
RXFCKOUT  
RXFEN#  
RXFA  
RXFDQ[4]  
RXFDQ[3]  
RXFDQ[2]  
RXFDQ[1]  
RXFDQ[0]  
RXFPT[2:0]  
RXFD[127:0]  
RXPAR  
Port number M  
Port number N  
n
3
th word  
n
2
th word  
n
1
th word  
n th word  
2nd word  
1st word 128 bits  
1st word 128 bits  
PASS  
SKIP  
49  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
Figure 3-11. Timing of Read Port Switch Due to SKIP Signal (During Read) (2/2)  
(b) Skipped port and next port are the same  
RXFCKOUT  
RXFEN#  
RXFA  
RXFDQ[4]  
RXFDQ[3]  
RXFDQ[2]  
RXFDQ[1]  
RXFDQ[0]  
Port number M  
XX  
Port number M  
RXFPT[2:0]  
RXFD[127:0]  
2nd word  
n
3
th w ord  
n
2
th w ord  
n
1
th w ord  
n th word  
1st word 128 bits  
n+1 th word  
XX  
RXPAR  
PASS  
SKIP  
(3) Little endian/Big endian  
The µPD98433 has a function that sets the byte order of transmit and receive data in the FIFO bus interface to  
little endian or big endian. Little endian or big endian is selected by setting the BUSMODE bit of the MISCR  
register.  
In little endian mode, data is transferred leading with the LSB of the data bus. In big endian mode, data is  
transferred leading with the MSB. Setting the BUSMODE bit of the MISCR register has no affect on the byte  
order of the register bus interface.  
50  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.7.2 Register bus interface  
The µPD98433 provides a register bus interface for accessing control registers, statistics counters, and other on-  
chip registers of the µPD98433. The register bus interface consists of a 32-bit wide bidirectional data bus, 11-bit width  
address bus, and control signals (HCS# signal, HRW signal, and HACK# signal).  
(1) Register read/write control  
On a read access of an internal register, the host system sets the address of the register to be read in  
HA[10:0] and makes the HRW signal high level and the HCS# signal low level. When the µPD98433  
recognizes a read access from the states of the HRW signal and HCS# signal, it sets the HACK# signal to low  
level first, and reads the necessary data. When the data that was read is set at HD[31:0], the µPD98433 sets  
the HACK# signal to low level. The host system, which fetch the data at HD[31:0] after the HACK# signal  
becomes low level, subsequently returns the HCS# signal to high level. The host system must maintain the  
states of HA[10:0], the HRW signal, and the HCS# signal until the HACK# signal is low level and it fetches the  
data. When the host system fetches the data and sets the HCS# signal high level, the µPD98433 terminates  
the read cycle. The HACK# signal is low level for one cycle of HCLK.  
On a write access of an internal register, the host system sets the address of the register to be written in  
HA[10:0] and the write data in HD[31:0] and sets the HRW signal to low level and the HCS# signal to low level.  
When the µPD98433 recognizes a write access from the states of the HRW signal and HCS# signal, it sets the  
HACK# signal to high level first, and starts writing the data at HD[31:0]. When it finishes writing, the µPD98433  
sets the HACK# signal to low level and notifies the host system. The host system must maintain the states of  
HA[10:0], HD[31:0], the HRW signal, and the HCS# signal until the HACK# signal becomes low level and the  
writing of data ends. When writing ends and the host system sets the HCS# signal to high level, the µPD98433  
ends the write cycle. The HACK# signal is low level for one cycle of HCLK.  
(2) Register address mapping  
The registers that a host CPU accesses are classified as port control registers, statistics counters, and global  
registers. Port control registers and statistics counters, which are established for each port, are used for  
setting the operation and reading the status information for each port, as well as for reading statistical  
information. Global registers, which are registers for making settings for all ports, are used in common when  
using each port.  
These registers are specified by address data at HA[10:0]. HA[10:0] is divided into two parts. Its higher bits  
[10:8] input the port number of the port for which register access is desired and its lower bits HA[7:0] input the  
address of the register to be accessed. Figure 3-12 shows the relationship between HA[10:0] and port  
numbers and register addresses, as well as providing an example.  
Figure 3-12. Register Address Bus  
HA10  
HA9  
HA8  
HA7  
HA6  
HA5  
HA4  
HA3  
HA2  
HA1  
HA0  
Port number  
Register address  
Example Accessing MACC3 register of port 3 (Register address: 26H)  
HA10  
0
HA9  
1
HA8  
1
HA7  
0
HA6  
0
HA5  
1
HA4  
0
HA3  
0
HA2  
1
HA1  
1
HA0  
0
The value of HA[10:8] is ignored when accessing a global register.  
Moreover, registers related to the MII management interface (MIIC, MCMD, MADR, MWTD, MSTA, and MIND  
registers) are valid only when the port number is set to 0.  
51  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
(3) Interrupt servicing  
If an interrupt source generates, the µPD98433 makes the INT# signal low level and notifies the host system.  
The following are sources of interrupts.  
Transmit packet status information shown in the TSVREG register  
Receive packet status information shown in the RSVREG register  
FIFO status information shown in the FSVREG register  
Statistics counter overflow shown in the CAR1 and CAR2 registers  
When an INT# signal is asserted, the host system can find out the port at which it occurred and what status  
caused the INT# signal to be asserted by reading the STIR register. It also can identify the detailed interrupt  
source by reading the status register of the corresponding port. Moreover, status information is accumulated  
for each packet.  
When an interrupt source that asserts an INT# signal occurs in the status register established for each port,  
the corresponding bit of the STIR register is set to 1. Reading the STIR register does not clear the status  
register or the INT# signal.  
For each interrupt source, it is possible to mask interrupts individually by their source. When an interrupt  
occurs for a masked source, the corresponding bit of each status register is set to 1, but will not be the source  
for asserting INT# signal, thus the corresponding bit of the STIR register is not set to 1.  
Each status register is cleared automatically when it is read if the SRRC bit of the MISCR register is set to 1.  
The INT# signal is deasserted when the status registers of all ports are cleared (excluding masked bits).  
52  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.8 Network Interface  
The µPD98433 has an on-chip GMII (Gigabit Media Independent Interface), MII (Media Independent Interface) and  
TBI (Ten Bit Interface) compliant with IEEE802.3 as network side interfaces. By setting the GMII/MII bit of the PYTBIC  
register and the IFMOD field of the MACC2 register, it is possible to select the interface to use in each port. Each  
interface is selected by the user setting registers. Moreover, the TBI is selected in initial setup of the µPD98433 and a  
TBI IDLE (/I/) code is output by TXD on startup.  
These three kinds of interface are implemented by port through the alternate functions of pins. Therefore, one  
interface is used for one port. A pair of MII management interfaces is also implemented. These can be used in PHY  
device setting, when reading status, or in negotiation with a link partner when using auto-negotiation.  
Before using a line interface, set the PHY address in the PHYC register.  
3.8.1 GMII (Gigabit Media Independent Interface)  
GMII, which is an interface defined by IEEE802.3, realizes a transmit and receive data interface that is independent  
of media type at the transfer speed of 1000 Mbps. This interface has an 8-bit wide (octet) data bus and control signals  
for transmit and receive data.  
The µPD98433 supports an octet data bus and control signals for transmission/reception for each port.  
In order to use the GMII interface, set the GMII/MII field of the PYTBIC register of the TBI to 1 and set the IFMOD  
field of the MACC2 register to ‘10’.  
3.8.2 TBI (Ten Bit Interface)  
TBI, which is an interface defined by IEEE802.3, is an interface for connecting to a physical layer device (mainly  
SERDES) at the transfer speed of 1000 Mbps. This interface has a 10-bit wide (octet) data bus and control signals for  
transmit and receive data.  
The µPD98433 supports a 10-bit data bus and control signals for transmission/reception for each port.  
In order to use the TBI interface, set the GMII/MII field of the PYTBIC register of the TBI to 0 and set the IFMOD  
field of the MACC2 register to ‘10’.  
3.8.3 MII (Media Independent Interface)  
MII, which is an interface defined by IEEE802.3, realizes a transmit and receive data interface that is independent  
of media type (such as STP, UTP, optical fiber) at the transfer speed of 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps. This interface has a 4-  
bit wide (nibble) data bus and control signals for transmit and receive data.  
The µPD98433 supports a nibble data bus and control signals for transmission/reception for each port.  
In order to use the MII interface, set the GMII/MII field of the PYTBIC register of the TBI to 1 and set the IFMOD  
field of the MACC2 register to ‘01’.  
53  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.8.4 MII management interface  
The µPD98433 provides an MII management interface, which is a 2-wire serial interface for access between PHY  
devices using MII management interface frames. This interface is used to access registers of an external PHY device  
or internal PCS (TBI) module.  
(1) MDC clock  
The µPD98433 generates the MDC clock that is used by the MII management interface by dividing the clock  
that is input to the HCLK pin. To satisfy IEEE standards, it is necessary to set a division ratio suited to HCLK  
input. The division ratio is set according to the CLKS field of the MIIC register. Table 3-5 shows the  
relationship between HCLK input and CLKS field settings.  
The MDC clock is stopped when the µPD98433 is started, when software reset that is effected by the SRST bit  
of the MACC1 register is executed, or when the MII management module is reset by the SRST bit of the MIIC  
register. Its operation is started and the clock is output when software reset by the SRST bit of the MACC1  
register and MII management module reset by the SRST bit of the MIIC register are released.  
Table 3-5. CLKS Field of MIIC Register and Frequency of MDC  
MIIC:CLKS  
Frequency of MDC  
Bit 2  
0
Bit 1  
0
Bit 0  
0
HCLK divided by 4  
0
0
1
HCLK divided by 4  
HCLK divided by 6  
HCLK divided by 8  
HCLK divided by 10  
HCLK divided by 14  
HCLK divided by 20  
HCLK divided by 28  
0
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
1
1
1
54  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
(2) MII management frame data  
Figure 3-13 shows the MII management frame structure.  
Figure 3-13. MII Management Frame Structure  
(a) Write  
MDC  
MDIO  
(Output)  
(Data)  
(Preamble) = all 1  
(Start bit) = 01  
(Operation) = 01  
(Turnaround) = 10  
PHYAD REGAD  
(b) Read or scan  
MDC  
MDIO  
(Output)  
(Preamble) = all 1  
(Start bit) = 01  
(Operation) = 10  
PHYAD  
REGAD  
MDIO  
(Input)  
MDI  
(Input data)  
(Turnaround)  
The µPD98433 automatically generates the preamble and start bits in an MII management frame. The opcode  
is added automatically in response to reading from or writing to an external PHY device register. PHYAD and  
REGAD, which show the device address of a PHY device and the address of a register within that PHY device,  
have the values set in the PYAD and RGAD fields of the MADR register, respectively, added.  
An operation to read from a PHY device is executed by making the RSTAT bit of the MCMD register 1. An  
operation to write to a PHY device is executed by writing data in the MCTL field of the MWTD register.  
The µPD98433 first serially outputs data from the preamble through REGAD as an MDIO signal and outputs  
the data set in the MCTL field of the MWTD register after turnaround if it is a write access. For a read access,  
serial data is input using an MDIO signal and is written in the MSTA field of the MSTA register.  
Preamble generation can be suppressed by setting the PRESUP bit of the MIIC register.  
55  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
(3) Access procedures  
MII management frames are transmitted and received as follows.  
First, check the BUSY bit of the MIND register to check whether or not there is a current MII management  
access. If the BUSY bit is on, wait until it is turned off. Next, set the target external PHY device address and  
the address of the register in the PHY in the PYAD field and RGAD field of the MADR register, respectively.  
For a write access, access is started by writing write data in the MCTL field of the MWTD register. The BUSY  
bit is turned on when writing to the MWTD register and turned off when write access ends.  
For a read access, access is started by setting the RSTAT bit of the MCMD register from 0 to 1. When the  
RSTAT bit is set to 1, the BUSY bit is on; the BUSY bit is off after read access ends. The host system can  
obtain the read data by reading the MSTA field of the MSTA register after confirming that the BUSY bit is off.  
The MII management interface block provides a SCAN command for continuously reading a specific PHY  
register. By setting the SCAN bit of the MCMD register to 1, read accesses occur continuously and a specific  
PHY register can be polled by reading the MSTA field of the MSTA register.  
3.8.5 µPD98433 connection of MII output signal pins  
When connecting an MII output signal (TXD, TX_EN, TX_ER, MDC, or MDIO) to a PHY device, connect a 26 to  
48 series resistor to each MII output signal as shown in Figure 3-14 in order to make the drive capacity of the MII  
output buffer match the IEEE802.3 standard.  
Figure 3-14. Connection of MII Output Signal Pin  
µPD98433  
26 to 48 Ω  
External PHY device  
TXD/TX_EN/TX_ER/MDC/MDIO  
TXD/TXEN/TXER/MDC/MDIO  
3.8.6 Auto-negotiation  
The µPD98433 has an auto-negotiation function that is compliant with IEEE 802.3 Chapter 37. This function is  
valid only when operating in TBI mode.  
In order to access the PHY register or status that controls auto-negotiation, access it using the MII management  
interface. Auto-negotiation is performed as follows.  
First, write base page data in the PYANA register. Next, write 1 in the RAN bit of the PYCNT register to restart  
auto-negotiation. Wait for the PRX bit of the PYANEX register to become 1 and for page swapping to end. After the  
PRX bit of the PYANEX register becomes 1, read the PYANBP register. At this time, if the NEXT PAGE function is  
supported both locally and by the link partner, write next page data in the PYANNP register. Then wait for the PRX bit  
of the PYANEX register to become 1 and for page swapping to end. After the PRX bit of the PYANEX register  
becomes 1, read the PYANLPN register. If there is further NEXT PAGE data to transmit either locally or on the link  
partner, write the next page data in the PYANNP register and perform a NEXT PAGE swap.  
If the NEXT PAGE function is not supported either locally or by the link partner, when NEXT PAGE swapping ends,  
wait for the AND bit of the PYSTS register to become 1 and for auto-negotiation to complete. If the AND bit of the  
PYSTS register becomes 1, a link is established and normal transmission/reception is possible.  
56  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.9 Flow Control  
The µPD98433 realizes flow control by performing the pause control frame processing in IEEE 802.3 Chapter 31.  
The purpose of flow control is to reduce the frequency of transmitting packets that were transmitted from another  
terminal that is connected point-to-point in full-duplex operation. In a system, there are limits on the capacity of on-  
chip receive FIFO. If frames are received with a certain frequency and the higher layer cannot cope with them  
continuously, a receive FIFO overflow may occur. Flow control is used to prevent such a receive FIFO overflow.  
When a pause control frame is received, the value of the pause timer field of the control frame is loaded in the  
pause timer in the MAC. If the pause timer is not 0, the next transmit is started after the time specified in the pause  
timer elapses.  
On the other hand, to suppress data transmission from another terminal on the network, generate the reserved  
multicast address (01-80-C2-00-00-01), pause opcode, and 16-bit pause timer value and transmit them as a pause  
control frame.  
3.9.1 Control frame reception  
The µPD98433 enables control frame receive detection when the RFCEN bit of the MACC1 register is 1. Detection  
of a pause control frame is performed by checking the destination address and the opcode of the type field. In order  
for a receive data stream to be detected as a pause control frame, it must have either the reserved multicast address  
(01-80-C2-00-00-01) or a unicast address given by the MAC in the destination address. In addition, it must have  
8808H in the length/type field and the correct pause opcode 0001H in the control opcode field.  
When the µPD98433 receives a valid pause control frame, it suppresses transmission for the period of the pause  
timer value that the received pause control packet contains.  
3.9.2 Flow control pause timer  
The flow control pause timer, which is used as a 16-bit wide timer, stores the pause timer value of a received pause  
control frame. If the pause timer value of the pause control frame is not 0, it shows that a new frame should not be  
transmitted. If the pause timer value of the received control frame is 0, normal transmission is resumed.  
If the RFCEN bit of the MACC1 register is 0, the value loaded in the pause timer is ignored. Regardless of the  
setting of the RFCEN bit, the pause timer always is updated when a valid control frame is received. When the setting  
of the RFCEN bit is changed, a software reset must be performed using the RMCRST bit of the MACC1 register.  
57  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.9.3 Pause control frame transmission  
The µPD98433 generates and transmits pause control frames according to the status of receive FIFO use and  
designation by an external pin.  
(1) Pause control frame issuance by FIFO threshold value specification  
When the FLWCNT bit of the MACC3 register is 1, the µPD98433 automatically generates and transmits pause  
control frames according to the relationship between the amount of data in receive FIFO and the threshold  
values set in the RFWMH field and RFWML field of the RFIC1 register.  
When the FLWCNT bit is 1, if the amount of data in receive FIFO exceeds the threshold level set in the  
RFWMH field of the RFIC1 register, a pause control frame is transmitted automatically. (Figure 3-15) If there  
is a data frame already being transmitted when an attempt is made to transmit a pause control frame, the  
pause control frame is transmitted after waiting for transmission of that frame to end.  
The pause control frame transmitted at this time is generated as follows. The reserved multicast address (01-  
80-C2-00-00-01) is given as the destination address and the station address set in the LSA1 register and LSA2  
register is added as the source address.  
8808H and the pause opcode 0001H are added in the length/type field and control opcode field, respectively,  
and the value set in the PTIME field of the CFPT register is added as the value of the pause timer.  
Once the amount of data in receive FIFO exceeds the value of the RFWMH field and the pause control frame  
has been automatically transmitted, the data stored in receive FIFO is transferred to the host system. When  
the amount of data in receive FIFO falls below the threshold level set in the RFWML field, the µPD98433  
generates a pause control frame in which the pause timer value is 0 and automatically transmits it to prompt a  
transmit resume from the destination.  
Figure 3-15. Pause Control Frame Transmission  
RFWMH  
RFWML  
Time  
: Pause frame transmitted  
: 0 pause frame transmitted  
58  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
(2) Pause retransmission interval timer  
The µPD98433 sets the initial value of the pause retransmission interval counter according to the setting of the  
IPTIME field of the ICFPT register. The pause retransmission interval timer starts a countdown when a pause  
control frame is sent, and if the amount of data stored in receive FIFO when it reaches 0 exceeds the threshold  
value set in the RFWMH field of the RFIC1 register, it automatically transmits a pause control frame again,  
prompting an extension of the pause period.  
When the amount of data in receive FIFO exceeds the value of the RFWMH field of the RFIC1 register and a  
pause control frame is transmitted, the next pause control frame is not transmitted until the IPTIME period  
ends, even if the value of the RFWMH field is exceeded. If the value of the RFWMH field is exceeded after the  
IPTIME period ends, a pause control frame is transmitted. (Figure 3-16 (a))  
When the amount of data in receive FIFO exceeds the value of the RFWMH field of the RFIC1 register and a  
pause control frame is transmitted, a pause control frame is transmitted again if the RFWMH field is exceeded  
when the IPTIME period ends. (Figure 3-16 (b))  
When the amount of data in receive FIFO exceeds the value of the RFWMH field of the RFIC1 register and a  
pause control frame is transmitted, if the value of the RFWMH field of the RFIC1 register is exceeded again  
during the IPTIME period after the amount of data in receive FIFO falls below the value of the RFWML field of  
the RFIC1 register and a 0 pause control frame is transmitted, a pause frame is transmitted regardless of the  
IPTIME period. (Figure 3-16 (c))  
If 0 is written in the IPTIME field of the ICFPT register by the µPD98433, the pause retransmission interval  
timer function is disabled.  
Figure 3-16. Reissuance of Pause Control Frame by Pause Retransmission Interval Timer (1/2)  
(a) Issuance of pause control frame after pause period elapses  
RFWMH  
RFWML  
IPTIME  
Time  
: Pause frame transmitted  
59  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
Figure 3-16. Reissuance of Pause Control Frame by Pause Retransmission Interval Timer (2/2)  
(b) Reissuance of pause control frame when pause period elapses  
RFWMH  
RFWML  
IPTIME  
: Pause frame transmitted  
Time  
(c) Issuance of zero pause control frame during pause period  
RFWMH  
RFWML  
IPTIME  
: Pause frame transmitted  
: 0 pause frame transmitted  
Time  
(3) Designation of pause control frame issuance by external pin  
The µPD98433 can designate issuance of a pause control frame using the external pins FCn (n = 0 to 7).  
These eight signal pins correspond to port numbers n (n = 0 to 7).  
When the memory or FIFO of a higher layer device is about to overflow, the higher layer device can assert an  
FC pin to designate transmission of a pause control frame.  
The pause value of the pause control frame that is issued uses the value set in the PTIME field of the CFPT  
register.  
60  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.10 Back Pressure  
The µPD98433 has an on-chip back pressure function. This function, which is valid only for half-duplex operation,  
is enabled if the amount of data in receive FIFO exceeds the threshold level set in the RFWMH field of the RFIC1  
register when the BACKPE bit of the MACC3 register is 1. A dummy packet is transmitted when this function is  
enabled. During a back-off period that is generated by collision of transmission of a normal packet, a dummy packet is  
transmitted after completion of the back-off period. Data in receive FIFO is transferred to the host system and this  
function is disabled when the amount of data in receive FIFO falls below the value of the RFWMH field of the RFIC1  
register. A collision that occurs at the time of backpressure is not counted as a collision.  
3.11 Operations on VLAN Frames  
If the TPID field of a receive or transmit packet contains the VLAN protocol identifier 8100H, the µPD98433  
recognizes it as a VLAN frame. Operations on VLAN frames are shown in the paragraphs below. Since each  
configuration sets registers by port, operations can be configured for each port.  
3.11.1 VLAN frame detection  
The µPD98433 always compares the value of the 2-octet TPID field that follows the source address in a receive  
packet or transmit packet to the value of the VLAN protocol identifier (8100H). A packet for which the two values  
match is considered a VLAN frame by the µPD98433.  
3.11.2 VLAN frame reception  
When the value of the TPID field in a receive packet matches the value of the VLAN protocol identifier (8100H), the  
VLAN bit of the RSVREG register is set to 1. In this case, decisions about the receive frame size are made based on  
a maximum of 1522 bytes and a minimum of 64 bytes. When filtering using the SIFT bit of the RFIC2 register (short  
packet discard), packet discard is performed using falling short of 64 bytes as the criterion even if a receive packet is  
recognized as a VLAN frame.  
3.11.3 VLAN frame transmission  
When transmitting a frame given as a transmit frame from a higher layer in which the value of the TPID field  
matches the VLAN type (8100H), it is recognized as a VLAN frame and the TVLTF bit of the TSVREG register is set to  
1.  
3.12 Statistics Counters  
The µPD98433 has an effective statistics counter set incorporated for each port in order to realize RMON and  
SNMP. Statistics counters, which are configured as 32-bit counters, provide the host system with 51 kinds of  
information about transmission and reception.  
Statistics counters count and save items of statistical information related to packet transmission/reception. (See  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS for the items counted.) Statistics counters are updated whenever a packet  
transmit or a packet receive terminates. Status information is stored in the status FIFO in the µPD98433 after an  
operation terminates, and statistics counters are updated in turn based on that information.  
Each counter is cleared to 0 if an overflow occurs and counting continues. Moreover, if an overflow occurs in a  
counter or an overflow occurs in the status FIFO, the corresponding bits of the CAR1 register and CAR2 register are  
set to 1, which causes an interrupt to occur. This interrupt can be masked by counter using the CAM1 register and  
CAM2 register.  
Statistics counters are cleared by a hardware reset. They also are cleared by a counter read when the ATZ bit if  
the STLC register is set to 1.  
61  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.13 Loopback  
Setting the LPBK bit of the MACC1 register to 1 loops back a GMII/MII transmit data stream internally as a  
GMII/MII receive data stream. TXCLKn is connected to RXCLKn internally. COLn and CRSn are ignored. When used  
in loopback, the FULLD bit of the MACC2 register must be set to 1 to set full-duplex operation mode. These settings  
can be made independently for each port. In the loopback, the transmission output (TXD, TX_EN, TX_ER) stops.  
3.14 Low Power Mode  
The µPD98433 has an on-chip configuration register for decreasing power consumption when there are unused  
ports. By setting a bit of the POWD register to 1, it is possible to cut clock supply to the corresponding port block to  
lower power consumption.  
Set the low power mode after transmission/reception is stopped, by clearing the TEN and REN bit of the MACC1  
register to 0. Ports for which 1 is set in the POWD register enter sleep mode and are eliminated by round-robin from  
the sequence in a receive operation.  
Since HCLK is not supplied to a port in sleep mode, it is not possible to access port configuration registers during  
sleep. Moreover, since the previous settings of a register that has entered sleep mode are not retained, they must be  
reset after sleep is canceled.  
If sleep mode is entered without clearing an interrupt source, an INT# signal may be asserted. Since port  
configuration registers cannot be accessed and cleared in sleep mode, set ports to sleep mode by setting the POWD  
register after setting the TEN and REN bits of the MACC1 register to 0, and clearing interrupt sources of the ports in  
question.  
To set a port to sleep mode during a read operation from receive FIFO or a write operation to transmit FIFO, do so  
after the FIFO bus operation for the relevant port becomes IDLE.  
If sleep is set while receiving from a network or while transmitting to a network, the packet being received or  
transmitted is ended. Data already stored in FIFO also is not saved. When canceling sleep, initialize FIFO using the  
TXFFLH bit of the MACC3 register and RXFFLH bit of the MACC3 register after sleep mode cancellation and execute  
a software reset. (See 3.15 regarding the software reset procedure.)  
Moreover, the MII serial management interface cannot be used if port 0 is set to sleep mode.  
The procedure for setting sleep mode is as follows. First, perform a software reset of ports to be set to sleep mode.  
Next, set ports to be set to sleep mode using the bits of the relevant ports in the POWD (FFH) register.  
The procedure for canceling sleep mode is as follows. First, reset the bits of the relevant ports in sleep mode in the  
POWD (FFH) register. Next, perform a software reset of ports for which sleep mode was canceled.  
62  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.15 Software Reset  
The µPD98433 requires software resets at the following times.  
After switching TBI, GMII, and MII modes  
After manually changing full-duplex and half-duplex operation  
After switching normal operation and loopback mode  
Follow the procedure below for setting or canceling a software reset of the µPD98433.  
Reset setup procedure  
(1) Set the TEN and REN bits of the MACC1 register to 0.  
(2) Set the RST bit of the PYCNT register to 1.  
(3) Set the SRT bit of the PYTBIC register to 1.  
(4) Set the SRST bit of the MIIC register to 1 (port 0 only).  
(5) Set the TFRST, RFRST, TMCRST, RMCRST, and SRST bits of the MACC1 register to 1.  
(6) Set the TXFFLH and RXFFLH bits of the MACC3 register to 1.  
(7) Set the RST bit of the STLC register to 1.  
Reset cancellation procedure  
(1) Set the RST bit of the STLC register to 0.  
(2) Set the RXFFLH bit of the MACC3 register to 0.  
(3) Set the RFRST, RMCRST, and SRST bits of the MACC1 register to 0.  
(4) Set the SRST bit of the MIIC register to 0.  
(5) Set the SRT bit of the PYTBIC register to 0.  
(6) Set the TFRST and TMCRST bits of the MACC1 register to 0.  
(7) Set the TXFFLH bit of the MACC3 register to 0.  
(8) Set the TEN and REN bits of the MACC1 register to 1.  
63  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 3 FUNCTION DESCRIPTION  
3.16 Turning Power ON  
The µPD98433 has two types of power supply pins: 2.5 V power supply pins for internal units (VDD), 3.3 V power  
supply pins for physical layer interface I/O buffers (VDDQ).  
This section explains the sequence when power is turned ON.  
Figure 3-17. Recommended Timing of Turning Power ON  
3.3 V  
2.5 V  
0 V  
10 ms  
Keep the time difference from when the 2.5-V or 3.3-V power supply rises first to when both the power supplies are  
stabilized to within 10 ms.  
64  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
4.1 Control Register Map  
(1) Port control register map  
(1/2)  
Register Address  
HA[7:0]  
Name  
Function  
R/W  
Default  
00H  
MACC1  
MACC2  
IPGIFG  
HDREG  
LMAX  
MAC configuration register 1  
MAC configuration register 2  
IPG/IFG register  
R/W  
8000 0000H  
0000 7201H  
4060 5060H  
00A0 F037H  
0000 0600H  
01H  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
02H  
03H  
Half-duplex configuration register  
Maximum frame length configuration register  
Reserved  
04H  
05H to 07H  
08H  
MIIC  
MII serial management configuration register  
MII serial management command register  
MII serial management address register  
MII serial management write data register  
MII serial management read data register  
MII serial management indicator  
PHY configuration register  
Reserved  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
RO  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
09H  
MCMD  
MADR  
MWTD  
MSTA  
MIND  
PHYC  
0AH  
0BH  
0CH  
0DH  
0EH  
0FH  
RO  
R/W  
10H  
LSA1  
LSA2  
Station address register 1  
Station address register 2  
Reserved  
R/W  
R/W  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
11H  
12H to 1BH  
1CH  
1DH  
1EH  
1FH  
CAR1  
CAR2  
CAM1  
CAM2  
STLC  
AFR  
Carry register 1  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 FFFFH  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
Carry register 2  
Carry mask register 1  
Carry mask register 2  
20H  
Statistics counter configuration register  
Address filter configuration register  
HASH table 1  
21H  
22H  
HT1  
23H  
HT2  
HASH table 2  
24H  
CFPT  
ICFPT  
MACC3  
TIMR  
RIMR  
TSVREG  
RSVREG  
MACC pause value configuration register  
Internal pause timer register  
MAC configuration register 3  
Transmit interrupt mask timer  
Receive interrupt mask timer  
Transmit status register  
25H  
26H  
27H  
28H  
29H  
2AH  
Receive status register  
Caution Do not access addresses that are “Reserved”.  
65  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
(2/2)  
Register Address  
HA[7:0]  
Name  
Function  
R/W  
Default  
2BH  
FSVREG  
FIFO status register  
R/W  
0000 0000H  
2C to 2FH  
30H  
Reserved  
RFIC1  
RFIC2  
RFIC3  
TFIC1  
TFIC2  
UFCR  
Receive FIFO configuration register 1  
Receive FIFO configuration register 2  
Receive FIFO configuration register 3  
Transmit FIFO configuration register 1  
Transmit FIFO configuration register 2  
User field configuration register  
Reserved  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
17FF 0000H  
0000 000FH  
1FFF 1FFFH  
1200 0600H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
31H  
32H  
33H  
34H  
35H  
36H to 44H  
Caution Do not access addresses that are “Reserved”.  
(2) Global register map  
Register Address  
HA[7:0]  
Name  
Function  
R/W  
Default  
FAH  
Reserved  
FBH  
FCH  
FDH  
FEH  
FFH  
STIR  
Status information register  
FIFO configuration register  
Clock check register  
RO  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
07FF FFFFH  
0000 0001H  
0000 0000H  
MISCR  
CLKCHK  
VERID  
POWD  
R/W  
R/W  
RO  
Version register  
Power down control register  
R/W  
Caution Do not access addresses that are “Reserved”.  
(3) PCS configuration register map  
Register Address  
RGAD[4:0]  
Name  
Function  
R/W  
Default  
00H  
PYCNT  
PYSTS  
Control register  
Status register  
Reserved  
R/W  
RO  
0000H  
0149H  
01H  
02H and 03H  
04H  
PYANA  
PYANBP  
PYANEX  
PYANNP  
PYANLPN  
PYEX  
Auto-Negotiation Advertisement register  
Auto-Negotiation Link Partner Base Page Ability register  
Auto-Negotiation extension register  
Auto-Negotiation Next Page Transmit register  
Auto-Negotiation Link Partner Ability Next Page register  
Extension status register  
R/W  
RO  
0010H  
0000H  
0004H  
0000H  
0000H  
A000H  
0000H  
0004H  
05H  
06H  
RO  
07H  
R/W  
RO  
08H  
0FH  
RO  
10H  
PYJTR  
PYTBIC  
Jitter diagnosis register  
R/W  
R/W  
11H  
TBI control register  
Caution Do not access addresses that are “Reserved”.  
66  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
4.2 Port Configuration Registers  
Port configuration registers are registers for defining the operation of each port or for checking the status of each  
port. In order to access the registers of each port, the port number is input in HA[10:8] of the address bus HA[10:0]  
and the address of the register is input in HA[7:0].  
MACC1 - MAC configuration register 1 (Register address HA[7:0] = 00H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
18  
17  
16  
SRST  
Reserved  
RMCRST TMCRST RFRST TFRST  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
LPBK  
Reserved  
RFCEN  
Reserved  
REN Reserved TEN  
(1/2)  
Bit  
Name  
SRST  
Function  
Default  
31  
Software reset  
1
Setting this bit resets MAC module. It does not reset the register setting.  
30:20  
19  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
RMCRST  
TMCRST  
RFRST  
MAC receive control block software reset  
0
0
0
0
Setting this to 1 enables software reset. To cancel software reset, 0 must be  
written.  
18  
17  
16  
MAC transmit control block software reset  
Setting this to 1 enables software reset. To cancel software reset, 0 must be  
written.  
MAC receive block software reset  
Setting this to 1 enables software reset. To cancel software reset, 0 must be  
written.  
TFRST  
MAC transmit block software reset  
Setting this to 1 enables software reset. To cancel software reset, 0 must be  
written.  
15:9  
8
Reserved  
Write 0.  
LPBK  
Loopback  
0
0
Setting this bit loops back MAC transmit output to MAC receive input within  
the MAC module. Clearing this bit makes operation normal.  
7:6  
5
Reserved  
Write 0.  
RFCEN  
Receive flow control enable  
Setting this bit detects pause flow control frames and starts the MAC control  
receive block. Clearing this bit makes the MAC control receive block ignore  
pause flow control frames.  
4
Reserved  
Write 1.  
Note  
Note After a reset, this bit is set to 0. Set this bit to 1 in register settings.  
67  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
(2/2)  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
3
2
Reserved  
Write 0.  
REN  
Receive enable  
0
0
Setting this bit enables frame reception from PHY. Setting it to 0 stops frame  
reception.  
1
0
Reserved  
Write 0.  
TEN  
Transmit enable  
Setting this bit enables the MAC to transmit frames from a system. Setting it  
to 0 stops frame transmission.  
68  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
MACC2 - MAC configuration register 2 (Register address HA[7:0] = 01H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
PRELN  
Reserved  
IFMOD  
Reserved  
HUGEN LENCK Reserved PADEN CRCEN FULLD  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:16  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
15:12  
PRELN  
Preamble length  
7H  
Specifies the length of the preamble of a packet in bytes. The range of  
settings is as follows.  
5H PRELN FH  
The default value is 7H.  
11:10  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
9:8  
IFMOD  
Interface mode  
2H  
This field determines the type of interface the MAC is connecting.  
00 = Reserved  
01 = Nibble mode (10/100 Mbps MII)  
10 = Byte mode (1000 Mbps GMII/TBI)  
11 = Reserved  
7:6  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
5
HUGEN  
Huge frame enable  
0
0
This bit is set to enable the transmission/reception of frames that are longer  
than LMAX. Clear this bit for the MAC to limit the length of a transmit or  
receive frame to LMAX. When frame length is limited, be careful of  
occurrence conditions of transmit and receive status and count conditions of  
statistics counters.  
4
LENCK  
Length field check  
Setting this bit confirms that the value of the frame length field matches the  
actual data field length and outputs to transmit and receive status. Clear this  
bit if length field checking is not needed.  
3
2
Reserved  
Write 0.  
PADEN  
PAD/CRC enable  
0
Setting this bit performs the following operations.  
(1) Perform CRC addition.  
(2) For a packet whose packet length is less than 64 bytes, perform  
padding and then add CRC.  
1
0
CRCEN  
FULLD  
CRC enable  
0
1
Setting this bit performs CRC addition. If the configuration bit PADEN or  
PAD/CRC enable of TXFDQ is specified, the setting of the CRCEN bit is  
ignored. The default value is 0.  
Full-duplex  
Setting this bit operates in full-duplex mode. Clearing this bit operates in half-  
duplex mode.  
69  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
IPGIFG - IFG/IPG register (Register address HA[7:0] = 02H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
6
21  
5
20  
4
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
IPGR1  
Reserved  
IPGR2  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
3
MINIFG  
Reserved  
IPGT  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
30:24  
IPGR1  
NON-BACK-TO-BACK INTER-PACKET-GAP PART 1  
40H  
This field shows the carrierSense period within the inter-packet gap when  
transmitting. (The carrierSense period within the IPG is defined by IEEE  
802.3/4.2.3.2.1 ‘Carrier Deference’.) The range and condition of settings are  
as follows.  
8H(8) IPGR1 60H(96)  
(IPGR2-38H) IPGR1 (IPGR2-1CH)  
23  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
22:16  
IPGR2  
NON-BACK-TO-BACK INTER-PACKET-GAP PART 2  
This field shows the minimum period between packets when transmitting. It is  
set in BitTime units. The range of settings is as follows.  
40H(64) IPGR2 7FH(127)  
60H  
50H  
15:8  
MINIFG  
Minimum IFG  
This field sets the minimum period between frames when receiving. A frame  
for which the inter-frame gap is shorter than this value is not received. This is  
set in BitTime units. The range of settings is as follows.  
For 10/100 Mbps: 14H(20) MINIFG FFH(255)  
For 1000 Mbps:  
When status information addition is set Note 1  
60H(96) MINIFG FFH(255)  
When status information addition is not set Note 1  
28H(40) MINIFG FFH(255)  
7
Reserved  
Write 0.  
6:0  
IPGT  
BACK-TO-BACK INTER-PACKET-GAP  
60H  
This field shows the minimum period between packets when transmitting. This  
value is used when in full-duplex mode or when transmitting continuously. It is  
set in BitTime units. The range of settings is as follows.  
For 10/100 Mbps: 40H(64) IPGT 7FH(127)  
For 1000 Mbps:  
When CRC automatic addition is set Note 2  
48H(72) IPGT 7FH(127)  
When CRC automatic addition is not set Note 2  
68H(104) IPGT 7FH(127)  
Notes 1. The status information is appended when the APSS or APSE bit of the MACC3 register is set to 1.  
2. CRC automatic appending means specification by the TXFDQ signal or setting of the CRCE or PADEN bits  
of the MACC2 register to 1.  
70  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
HDREG - Half-duplex configuration register (Register address HA[7:0] = 03H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
Reserved  
ABEXT  
ABEXE BKPNB NBOF Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RTMAX  
Reserved  
COLW  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:24  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
23:20  
ABEXT  
ALTERNATE BINARY EXPONENTIAL BACKOFF TRUNCATION  
0AH  
When the ALTERNATE BINARY EXPONENTIAL BACKOFF ENABLE bit is  
set, backoff time is calculated using this field. The backoff time r (slotTime)  
calculated using this value is as follows.  
0 r < 2n  
n = ABEXT if n exceeds ABEXT when set value is less than 0AH.  
n = 0AH if n exceeds ABEXT when set value is 0AH or greater.  
19  
ABEXE  
BKPNB  
ALTERNATE BINARY EXPONENTIAL BACKOFF ENABLE  
Setting this bit makes settings that use the above ALTERNATE BINARY  
EXPONENTIAL BACKOFF TRUNCATION instead of the value that is the  
criterion in IEEE802.3.  
0
0
18  
Back pressure no backoff  
Setting this bit sets the MAC so that retransmission is possible immediately  
after a collision without taking a backoff period in the case of a back pressure  
operation. Clearing this bit makes this follow the binary exponential backoff  
rule.  
17  
NBOF  
No backoff  
0
Setting this bit sets the MAC so that retransmission is possible immediately  
after a collision without taking a backoff period. Clearing this bit makes this  
follow the binary exponential backoff rule.  
16  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
15:12  
RTMAX  
Maximum retransmissions  
0FH  
37H  
This sets the maximum number of retransmissions due to collisions. Specify  
0FH (15d) to conform with the IEEE802.3 standard.  
11:10  
9:0  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
COLW  
Collision window  
This configuration field corresponds to the slot time in which collisions occur  
(collision window) in an appropriately configured network. Since the collision  
window starts from the beginning of a transmit, the preamble and SFD are  
included. The relationship between the setting and the actual collision window  
is collision window = HDREG:COLW + 9.  
71  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
LMAX - Maximum frame length configuration register (Register address HA[7:0] = 04H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
LMAX  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:16  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
15:0  
LMAX  
Maximum frame length  
0600H  
This field sets a limit on the maximum frame length in both the transmit and  
receive directions. On a transmit, if the transmit packet length exceeds the  
value set in LMAX, the transmit aborts. On a receive, the operation differs  
according to the setting of the THRX field of the RFIC3 register. If THRX =  
1FFFH, a packet that exceeds LMAX is rejected in receive FIFO. If another  
value is set in THRX, the value of LMAX is invalid. Set a value of 40H (64) or  
more to LMAX.  
72  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
MIIC - MII serial management configuration register (Register address HA[7:0] = 08H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
16  
0
SRST  
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
1
Reserved  
PRESUP Reserved  
CLKS  
Bit  
Name  
SRST  
Function  
Default  
31  
MII management module reset  
0
Setting this bit resets the MII management module. Clearing this bit makes it  
possible to use MII management module in order to execute a serial  
management read/write cycle.  
30:5  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
4
PRESUP  
Preamble suppression  
0
Setting this bit reduces a management cycle to 32 clocks to omit preamble  
generation. This is an optional function described in IEEE 802.3/22.2.4.4.2.  
When this bit is cleared, a management cycle requires 64 clocks in order to  
execute a management read/write cycle after 32-clock generation of the  
preamble.  
3
Reserved  
Write 0.  
2:0  
CLKS  
MII management clock select  
000  
This field determines the clock frequency of the serial management clock  
(MDC). The settings of this field are as follows.  
000 = HCLK divided by 4  
001 = HCLK divided by 4  
010 = HCLK divided by 6  
011 = HCLK divided by 8  
100 = HCLK divided by 10  
101 = HCLK divided by 14  
110 = HCLK divided by 20  
111 = HCLK divided by 28  
Caution When accessing this register, input 000B in HA[10:8].  
73  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
MCMD - MII serial management command register (Register address HA[7:0] = 09H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
Reserved  
SCAN RSTAT  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:2  
1
Reserved  
Write 0.  
SCAN  
RSTAT  
Scan cycle  
0
0
Setting this bit executes a read cycle continuously. This can be used, for  
example, to monitor link failure.  
0
Read cycle  
Setting this bit executes a read cycle one time. The read data is returned in  
MSTA register.  
This bit is a write only.  
Caution When accessing this register, input 000B in HA[10:8].  
MADR - MII serial management address register (Register address HA[7:0] = 0AH) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Reserved  
PYAD  
Reserved  
RGAD  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:13  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
12:8  
PYAD  
PHY address  
00H  
00H  
This field corresponds to the 5-bit PHY address field of a management cycle.  
A maximum of 32 PHY address specifications can be made.  
7:5  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
4:0  
RGAD  
Register address  
This field corresponds to the 5-bit register address field of a management  
cycle. A maximum of 32 registers can be accessed.  
Caution When accessing this register, input 000B in HA[10:8].  
74  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
MWTD - MII serial management write data register (Register address HA[7:0] = 0BH) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
MCTL  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:16  
Reserved  
15:0  
MCTL  
MII write data  
0000H  
Performing a write to this register executes an MII management write cycle.  
The PHY address and register address of the MII management frame are set  
using the value set in the MADR register (0AH) and write data is set using the  
value set in MWTD (08H).  
Caution When accessing this register, input 000B in HA[10:8].  
MSTA - MII serial management read data register (Register address HA[7:0] = 0CH) Read only  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
MSTA  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:16  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
15:0  
MSTA  
MII read data  
0000H  
The 16-bit data read by an MII management read cycle can be read from this  
register.  
Caution When accessing this register, input 000B in HA[10:8].  
75  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
MIND - MII serial management indicator (Register address HA[7:0] = 0DH) Read only  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
2
Reserved  
NVAL  
SCAN BUSY  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:3  
2
Reserved  
Write 0.  
NVAL  
MSTA register invalid  
0
0
0
If 1 is returned in this bit, it shows that the MII management read cycle did not  
complete or the read data is not yet valid.  
1
0
SCAN  
BUSY  
Scan  
If 1 is returned in this bit, it shows that a scan operation (continuous MII  
management read cycles) is in progress.  
Busy  
If 1 is returned in this bit, it shows that the MII management block currently is  
executing an MII management read or write cycle.  
Caution When accessing this register, input 000B in HA[10:8].  
PHYC - PHY configuration register (Register address HA[7:0] = 0EH) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
2
Reserved  
TBIAD  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:5  
4:0  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
TBIAD  
TBI module address  
This sets the address value by which the TBI module of each port is  
00000  
referenced in MII serial management. Set values so they do not overlap with  
another physical layer.  
76  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
LSA1 - Station address register 1 (Register address HA[7:0] = 10H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
STA1  
STA3  
STA2  
STA4  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:24  
23:16  
15:8  
7:0  
STA1  
STA2  
STA3  
STA4  
Station address, 1st octet  
00H  
00H  
00H  
00H  
This field contains a station address SA[7:0]. SA[7:0] is written in 31:24.  
Station address, 2nd octet  
This field contains a station address SA[15:8]. SA[15:8] is written in 23:16.  
Station address, 3rd octet  
This field contains a station address SA[23:16]. SA[23:16] is written in 15:8.  
Station address, 4th octet  
This field contains a station address SA[31:24]. SA[31:24] is written in 7:0.  
In MII/GMII/TBI, station addresses are transmitted and received in the order 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st  
octet.  
LSA2 - Station address register 2 (Register address HA[7:0] = 11H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
STA5  
STA6  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
Reserved  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:24  
23:16  
15:0  
STA5  
Station address, 5th octet  
00H  
This field contains a station address SA[39:32]. SA[39:32] is written in 31:24.  
STA6  
Station address, 6th octet  
00H  
This field contains a station address SA[47:40]. SA[47:40] is written in 23:16.  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
In MII/GMII/TBI, station addresses are transmitted and received in the order 6th 5th 4th 3rd 2nd 1st  
octet.  
77  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
CAR1 - CARRY register 1 (Register address HA[7:0] = 1CH) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
6
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
C1R64 C1R127 C1R255 C1R511 C1R1K C1RMAX C1REXD  
Reserved  
C1RBY  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
5
0
C1RPK C1RFC C1RMC C1RBC C1RXC C1RXP C1RXU C1RAL C1RFL C1RCD C1RCS C1RUN C1ROV C1RFR C1RJB C1RDR  
CAR1 shows that statistics counters overflowed. Each bit corresponds to a statistics counter and 1 is written in the  
corresponding bit when an overflow occurs in a statistics counter. See CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
regarding the statistics counters.  
Bit  
Name  
C1R64  
Function  
Default  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
R64 counter carry bit  
R127 counter carry bit  
R255 counter carry bit  
R511 counter carry bit  
R1K counter carry bit  
RMAX counter carry bit  
REXD counter carry bit  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
C1R127  
C1R255  
C1R511  
C1R1K  
C1RMAX  
C1REXD  
24:17  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
C1RBY  
C1RPK  
C1RFC  
C1RMC  
C1RBC  
C1RXC  
C1RXP  
C1RXU  
C1RAL  
C1RFL  
C1RCD  
C1RCS  
C1RUN  
C1ROV  
C1RFR  
C1RJB  
C1RDR  
RBYT counter carry bit  
RPKT counter carry bit  
RFCS counter carry bit  
RMCA counter carry bit  
RBCA counter carry bit  
RXCF counter carry bit  
RXPF counter carry bit  
RXUO counter carry bit  
RALN counter carry bit  
RFLR counter carry bit  
RCDE counter carry bit  
RCSE counter carry bit  
RUND counter carry bit  
ROVR counter carry bit  
RFRG counter carry bit  
RJBR counter carry bit  
RDRP counter carry bit  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
78  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
CAR2 - Carry register 2 (Register address HA[7:0] = 1DH) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
6
21  
5
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
C2T64 C2T127 C2T255 C2T511 C2T1K C2TMAX C2TEXD  
Reserved  
C2TPAR C2TJB C2TFC C2TCF C2TOV  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
4
3
2
1
0
C2TUN C2TFG C2TBY C2TPK C2TMC C2TBC C2TPF C2TDF C2TED C2TSC C2TMA C2TLC C2TXC C2TNC Reserved C2TDP  
Bit  
Name  
C2T64  
Function  
Default  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
T64 counter carry bit  
T127 counter carry bit  
T255 counter carry bit  
T511 counter carry bit  
T1K counter carry bit  
TMAX counter carry bit  
TEXD counter carry bit  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
C2T127  
C2T255  
C2T511  
C2T1K  
C2TMAX  
C2TEXD  
24:21  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
C2TPAR  
C2TJB  
C2TFC  
C2TCF  
C2TOV  
C2TUN  
C2TFG  
C2TBY  
C2TPK  
C2TMC  
C2TBC  
C2TPF  
C2TDF  
C2TED  
C2TSC  
C2TMA  
C2TLC  
C2TXC  
C2TNC  
TFPE counter carry bit  
TJBR counter carry bit  
TFCS counter carry bit  
TXCF counter carry bit  
TOVR counter carry bit  
TUND counter carry bit  
TFRG counter carry bit  
TBYT counter carry bit  
TPKT counter carry bit  
TMCA counter carry bit  
TBCA counter carry bit  
TXPF counter carry bit  
TDFR counter carry bit  
TEDF counter carry bit  
TSCL counter carry bit  
TMCL counter carry bit  
TLCL counter carry bit  
TXCL counter carry bit  
TNCL counter carry bit  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Reserved  
Write 0.  
0
C2TDP  
TDRP counter carry bit  
0
79  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
CAM1 - Carry mask register (Register address HA[7:0] = 1EH) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
M1R64 M1R127 M1R255 M1R511 M1R1K M1RMAX M1REXD  
Reserved  
M1RBY  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
0
M1RPK M1RFC M1RMC MC1RBC M1RXC M1RXP M1RXU M1RAL M1RFL M1RCD M1RCS M1RUN M1ROV M1RFR MC1RJB M1RDR  
CAM1 masks INT# signals that occur when bits within the CAR1 register are set to 1. Setting a bit to 1 cancels the  
masking. Masking can be done by bit.  
Bit  
Name  
M1R64  
Function  
Default  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
R64 counter carry mask bit  
R127 counter carry mask bit  
R255 counter carry mask bit  
R511 counter carry mask bit  
R1K counter carry mask bit  
RMAX counter carry mask bit  
REXD counter carry mask bit  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
M1R127  
M1R255  
M1R511  
M1R1K  
M1RMAX  
M1REXD  
24:17  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
M1RBY  
M1RPK  
M1RFC  
M1RMC  
M1RBC  
M1RXC  
M1RXP  
M1RXU  
M1RAL  
M1RFL  
M1RCD  
M1RCS  
M1RUN  
M1ROV  
M1RFR  
M1RJB  
M1RDR  
RBYT counter carry mask bit  
RPKT counter carry mask bit  
RFCS counter carry mask bit  
RMCA counter carry mask bit  
RBCA counter carry mask bit  
RXCF counter carry mask bit  
RXPF counter carry mask bit  
RXUO counter carry mask bit  
RALN counter carry mask bit  
RFLR counter carry mask bit  
RCDE counter carry mask bit  
RCSE counter carry mask bit  
RUND counter carry mask bit  
ROVR counter carry mask bit  
RFRG counter carry mask bit  
RJBR counter carry mask bit  
RDRP counter carry mask bit  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
80  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
CAM2 - Carry mask register 2 (Register address HA[7:0] = 1FH) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
5
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
M2T64 M2T127 M2T255 M2T511 M2T1K M2TMAX M2TEXD  
Reserved  
M2TPAR M2TJB M2TFC M2TCF M2TOV  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
4
3
2
1
0
M2TUN M2TFG M2TBY M2TPK M2TMC M2TBC M2TPF M2TDF M2TED M2TSC M2TMA M2TLC M2TXC M2TNC Reserved M2TDP  
Bit  
Name  
M2T64  
Function  
Default  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
T64 counter carry mask bit  
T127 counter carry mask bit  
T255 counter carry mask bit  
T511 counter carry mask bit  
T1K counter carry mask bit  
TMAX counter carry mask bit  
TEXD counter carry mask bit  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
M2T127  
M2T255  
M2T511  
M2T1K  
M2TMAX  
M2TEXD  
24:21  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
M2TPAR  
M2TJB  
M2TFC  
M2TCF  
M2TOV  
M2TUN  
M2TFG  
M2TBY  
M2TPK  
M2TMC  
M2TBC  
M2TPF  
M2TDF  
M2TED  
M2TSC  
M2TMA  
M2TLC  
M2TXC  
M2TNC  
TFPE counter carry mask bit  
TJBR counter carry mask bit  
TFCS counter carry mask bit  
TXCF counter carry mask bit  
TOVR counter carry mask bit  
TUND counter carry mask bit  
TFRG counter carry mask bit  
TBYT counter carry mask bit  
TPKT counter carry mask bit  
TMCA counter carry mask bit  
TBCA counter carry mask bit  
TXPF counter carry mask bit  
TDFR counter carry mask bit  
TEDF counter carry mask bit  
TSCL counter carry mask bit  
TMCL counter carry mask bit  
TLCL counter carry mask bit  
TXCL counter carry mask bit  
TNCL counter carry mask bit  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Reserved  
Write 0.  
0
M2TDP  
TDRP counter carry mask bit  
0
81  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
STLC - Statistics counter configuration register (Register address HA[7:0] = 20H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
Reserved  
ATZ  
Reserved RST  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:3  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
2
1
0
ATZ  
Statistics counter read reset  
0
0
If set to 1, statistics counters are reset on a read.  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
RST  
Statistics counter software reset  
If set to 1, software reset is set.  
AFR - Address filter configuration register (Register address HA[7:0] = 21H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
PRO  
AUC  
PRM  
AMC  
ABC  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:5  
4
Reserved  
Write 0.  
PRO  
AUC  
Promiscuous mode  
0
0
When this bit is 1, packets of all destination addresses are received.  
3
Unicast receive  
When this bit is 1, all unicast packets are received.  
When this bit is 0, unicast packets set in LSA1 and LSA2 are received.  
2
PRM  
Multicast receive  
0
When this bit is 1, all multicast packets are received.  
When receiving a broadcast packet at this time, it receives as a kind of the  
multicast packet.  
When this bit is 0, multicast packets set in AMC are received.  
1
0
AMC  
ABC  
Conditional multicast receive  
0
0
When this bit is 1, multicast packets selected using hash tables are received.  
When this bit is 0, multicast packets are not received.  
Broadcast receive  
When this bit is 1, broadcast packets are received.  
82  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
HT1 - HASH table 1 (Register address HA[7:0] = 22H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
6
21  
5
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
HT1[31:16]  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
HT1[15:0]  
Bit  
Name  
HT1  
Function  
Default  
0000 0000H  
31:0  
HASH table 1  
This is the higher table of the hash tables used in address filtering of multicast  
packets.  
HT2 - HASH table 2 (Register address HA[7:0] = 23H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
6
21  
5
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
HT2[31:16]  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
HT2[15:0]  
Bit  
Name  
HT2  
Function  
Default  
0000 0000H  
31:0  
HASH table 2  
This is the lower table of the hash tables used in address filtering of multicast  
packets.  
CFPT - MACC pause value configuration register (Register address HA[7:0] = 24H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
PTIME[15:0]  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:16  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
15:0  
PTIME  
Pause parameter  
FFFFH  
This specifies the pause period of an opposing device that is given in a pause  
control frame in pause_quanta units (512 bit time).  
83  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
ICFPT - Internal pause timer register (Register address HA[7:0] = 25H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
IPTIME[15:0]  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:16  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
15:0  
IPTIME  
Pause retransmission interval timer  
0000H  
This register sets the initial value of the pause retransmission interval timer in  
pause_quanta units (512-bit time). The pause retransmission interval timer  
begins a countdown when a pause control frame is sent and if the amount of  
data stored in receive FIFO exceeds a threshold value (RFWMH field of the  
RFIC1 register) when it reaches 0, it automatically sends a pause frame again  
to extend the pause period.  
Writing 0 in this field disables the pause retransmission interval timer function.  
84  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
MACC3 - MAC configuration register 3 (Register address HA[7:0] = 26H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
Reserved  
APSE  
APSS Reserved BACKPE FLWCNT TXFFLH RXFFLH  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:7  
6
Reserved  
Write 0.  
APSE  
APSS  
Status information addition (end of packet data)  
0
When this bit is 1, status information is added at the end of a packet. Do not  
set APSE and APSS to 1 simultaneously.  
5
Status information addition (start of packet data)  
0
When this bit is 1, status information is added at the start of a packet. Do not  
set APSE and APSS to 1 simultaneously.  
4
3
2
1
Reserved  
Write 0.  
BACKPE  
FLWCNT  
TXFFLH  
Back pressure enable  
0
0
0
When this bit is 1, the back pressure function is enabled.  
Transmit flow control enable  
When this bit is 1, automatic transmission of pause control frames is enabled.  
Transmit FIFO flash  
When this bit is 1, all contents of a transmit FIFO are cleared. To cancel this  
function, 0 must be written.  
Use the function of this bit only within the flow of software reset, and do not  
use FIFO flash independently.  
0
RXFFLH  
Receive FIFO flash  
0
When this bit is 1, all contents of a receive FIFO are cleared. To cancel this  
function, 0 must be written.  
Use the function of this bit only within the flow of software reset, and do not  
use FIFO flash independently.  
85  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
TIMR - Transmit interrupt mask register (Register address HA[7:0] = 27H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
Reserved  
ITPER ITFOV ITFUN ITWMH  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
ITVLTF IBPA  
ITPCF  
ITCF ITURUN ITGNT ITLCOL ITMXCO ITEDFR ITDFR ITBRO ITMUL ITDONE ITFLOR ITFLER ITCRCE  
TIMR masks the occurrence of INT# signals by cause. Setting each bit to 1 cancels masking.  
(1/2)  
Bit  
31:20  
Name  
Function  
Default  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
19  
18  
17  
16  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
ITPER  
Transmit FIFO parity error  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the FSVREG register is masked.  
ITFOV  
ITFUN  
ITWMH  
ITVLTF  
IBPA  
Transmit FIFO overrun  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the FSVREG register is masked.  
Transmit FIFO underrun  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the FSVREG register is masked.  
Transmit full level exceeded  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the FSVREG register is masked.  
VLAN frame transmit  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
Back pressure  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
ITPCF  
ITCF  
Pause control frame transmit  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
Control frame transmit  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
ITURUN  
ITGNT  
ITLCOL  
ITMXCO  
ITEDFR  
ITDFR  
ITBRO  
ITMUL  
ITDONE  
Transmit underrun occurrence  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
Transmission of packet longer than LMAX  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
Late collision  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
8
Excessive collisions  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
7
Excessive delay  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
6
Transmission delay  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
5
Broadcast packet transmit  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
4
Multicast packet transmit  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
3
Transmission termination  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
86  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
(2/2)  
Bit  
Name  
ITFLOR  
Function  
Default  
2
1
0
Length field check  
0
0
0
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
ITFLER  
ITCRCE  
Data length mismatch  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
Transmit CRC error  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the TSVREG register is masked.  
RIMR - Receive interrupt mask register (Register address HA[7:0] = 28H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
18  
17  
16  
Reserved  
IRFOV IRWMH IRWML Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
3
2
1
0
Reserved VLAN USOP RPCF RCFR DBNB RBRO RMUL  
ROK  
RLOR RLER RCRCE RCV  
RFCA REPS RPPD  
RIMR masks the occurrence of INT# signals by cause. Setting each bit to 1 cancels masking.  
(1/2)  
Bit  
31:20  
Name  
Function  
Default  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
19  
18  
17  
16:15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
IRFOV  
Receive FIFO overflow  
0
0
0
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the FSVREG register is masked.  
IRWMH  
IRWML  
Pause frame transmission level  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the FSVREG register is masked.  
Zero frame transmission level  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the FSVREG register is masked.  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
VLAN  
USOP  
RPCF  
RCFR  
DBNB  
RBRO  
RMUL  
ROK  
VLAN frame  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
Undefined opcode control frame receive  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
Pause control frame receive  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
Control frame receive  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
Dribble nibble error  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
Broadcast packet receive  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
8
Multicast packet receive  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
7
Receive termination  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
87  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
(2/2)  
Bit  
Name  
RLOR  
Function  
Default  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Length field check  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
RLER  
RCRCE  
RCV  
Data length mismatch  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
CRC error  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
RXER detection  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
RFCA  
REPS  
RPPD  
False Carrier detection  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
Invalid packet receive  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
Receive packet ignored  
If 0, the interrupt of the corresponding bit of the RSVREG register is masked.  
88  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
TSVREG - Transmit status register (Register address HA[7:0] = 29H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
TVLTF  
BPA  
TPCF  
TCF TURUN TGNT TLCOL TMXCO TEDFR TDFR TBRO TMUL TDONE TFLOR TFLER TCRCE  
This register shows the interrupt source when the INT# signal is low level due to the status of a transmit packet  
(except Reserved). When the interrupt source of each bit occurs, the corresponding bit is set to 1 and the INT# signal  
is made low level. When an interrupt occurs due to a source that is masked by the TIMR register, it sets the  
corresponding bit to 1 but does not cause the INT# signal to be made low level.  
This register is updated whenever a transmit terminates or a transmit abort occurs.  
If the SRRC bit of the MISCR register is set to 1, reading this register automatically clears all of its bits.  
(1/2)  
Bit  
31:16  
Name  
Function  
Default  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
15  
14  
TVLTF  
VLAN frame transmitted  
0
0
If 1, this shows that the length/type field of the transmit frame contained the  
VLAN protocol identifier 8100H.  
BPA  
Back pressure  
If 1, this shows that a dummy packet was transmitted due to back pressure  
after the previous transmit.  
13  
12  
11  
TPCF  
TCF  
Pause control frame transmitted  
0
0
0
If 1, this shows that a pause control frame was transmitted.  
Control frame transmitted  
If 1, this shows that a control frame was transmitted.  
TURUN  
Transmit abort occurred  
This shows that a transmit was aborted due to a transmit underrun or a parity  
error.  
10  
TGNT  
Packet longer than LMAX transmitted  
0
If 1, this shows that a packet longer than the packet length set in the LMAX  
register was transmitted. This bit is 1 only when the HUGEN bit of the MACC2  
register is 0.  
9
8
7
6
TLCOL  
TMXCO  
TEDFR  
TDFR  
Late collision  
0
0
0
0
If 1, this shows that a collision occurred outside the collision window set in the  
HDREG register.  
Excessive collisions  
If 1, this shows that more collisions occurred than the maximum number of  
retransmissions set in the HDREG register.  
Excessive delay  
If 1, this shows that excessive delay (transmit could not start after 24288 bit  
time elapsed) occurred.  
Transmit delay  
If 1, this shows that a transmit delay occurred. If the transmit is aborted, it  
does not become 1 (this occurs if a transmit succeeds).  
89  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
(2/2)  
Bit  
Name  
TBRO  
Function  
Default  
5
4
3
2
Broadcast packet transmitted  
0
0
0
0
If 1, this shows that a broadcast packet was transmitted. If the transmit is  
aborted, it does not become 1 (this occurs if a transmit succeeds).  
TMUL  
Multicast packet transmitted  
If 1, this shows that a multicast packet was transmitted. If the transmit is  
aborted, it does not become 1 (this occurs if a transmit succeeds).  
TDONE  
TFLOR  
Transmit termination  
If 1, this shows that a transmit terminated normally. If the transmit is aborted,  
it does not become 1 (this occurs if a transmit succeeds).  
Length field check  
If 1, this shows that the value of the length field in a transmit packet exceeds  
1500. If the LENCK bit of the MACC2 register is 0, this bit does not become 1  
(this occurs if a transmit succeeds).  
1
TFLER  
Data length mismatch  
0
If 1, this shows that the value of the length field does not match the length of  
the data field in a transmit packet. If the LENCK bit of the MACC2 register is  
0, this bit does not become 1. Moreover, if the value of the length field  
exceeds 1500, TFLOR becomes 1 but TFLER becomes 0. In cases in which  
the length field value is less than 46, this status is invalid (this occurs if a  
transmit succeeds).  
Transmit CRC error  
0
TCRCE  
0
If 1, this shows that the CRC code the host added to a transmit packet is  
incorrect. The case of CRC error is as follows.  
When the resending after the collisions, a transmit was aborted due to a  
transmit underrun.  
When aborted by a transmit underrun.  
When aborted by a Excessive collisions.  
When aborted by a Late collision.  
When truncated by LMAX.  
Caution This bit does not become 1 when the transmit is aborted by  
transmit delay or when the CRCEN bit of the MACC2 register is 1.  
90  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
RSVREG - Receive status register (Register address HA[7:0] - 2AH) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
Reserved VLAN USOP RPCF RCFR DBNB RBRO RMUL  
ROK  
RLOR RLER RCRCE RCV  
RFCA REPS RPPD  
This register shows the interrupt source when the INT# signal is low level due to the status of a receive packet  
(except Reserved). When the interrupt source of each bit occurs, the corresponding bit is set to 1 and the INT# signal  
is made low level. When an interrupt occurs due to a source that is masked by the RIMR register, it sets the  
corresponding bit to 1 but does not cause the INT# signal to be made low level.  
This register is updated whenever a packet is received by the MAC module.  
If the SRRC bit of the MISCR register is set to 1, reading this register automatically clears all of its bits.  
(1/2)  
Bit  
31:15  
Name  
Function  
Default  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
14  
13  
12  
11  
VLAN  
VLAN frame  
0
0
0
0
If 1, this shows that the TPID field of the received packet matched the VLAN  
type (8100H).  
USOP  
RPCF  
RCFR  
Control frame containing undefined opcode received  
If 1, this shows that a control frame containing an undefined opcode was  
received.  
Pause control frame received  
If 1, this shows that a pause control frame was received, If a CRC error  
occurs, this bit does not become 1.  
Control frame received  
If 1, this shows that a control frame was received. If a CRC error occurs, this  
bit does not become 1.  
10  
9
DBNB  
RBRO  
RMUL  
ROK  
Packet containing dribble nibble received  
0
0
0
0
If 1, this shows that a dribble nibble occurred in the received packet.  
Broadcast packet received  
If 1, this shows that a broadcast packet was received.  
8
Multicast packet received  
If 1, this shows that a multicast packet was received.  
7
Receive termination  
If 1, this shows that a receive terminated. If a CRC error or RX_ER occurs  
while receiving, this bit does not become 1.  
6
RLOR  
Length field check  
0
If 1, this shows that the value of the length field of the received packet was a  
value exceeding 1500.  
91  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
(2/2)  
Bit  
Name  
RLER  
Function  
Default  
5
Data length mismatch  
0
If 1, this shows that the value of the length field does not match the length of  
the data field in a received packet. If the LENCK bit of the MACC2 register is  
0, this bit does not become 1. Moreover, if the value of the length field  
exceeds 1500, RLOR becomes 1 but RLER becomes 0. In cases in which the  
length field value is less than 46, this status becomes 0.  
4
3
2
RCRCE  
RCV  
CRC error  
0
0
0
If 1, this shows that a CRC error occurred in the received packet.  
Receive code error  
While receiving a packet, 1 or more nibbles was detected as a code error.  
RFCANote  
Invalid carrier detection  
If 1, this shows that a False Carrier was detected after the previous receive.  
In MII mode, RX_ER = 1, RX_DV = 0, RXD[3:0] = EH  
In GMII mode, RX_ER = 1, RX_DV = 0, RXD[7:0] = 0EH  
In TBI mode, this shows that there was input such that “when a code other  
than IDLE was received, that code line began with a code other than SPD”.  
REPSNote  
1
0
Invalid packet receive  
0
0
If 1, this shows that there was an invalid packet receive after the last receive  
(packet that has only preamble + SFD or 1 nibble of data). The invalid packet  
that is the reason this bit is 1 is discarded internally by the MAC.  
RPPDNote  
Receive packet ignored  
When this bit is 1, it indicates that IFG during reception is shorter than the  
value set to the MINIFG field of the IPGIFG register and is not recognized as a  
valid packet. The invalid packet that is the reason this bit is 1 is discarded  
internally by the MAC.  
Note The status of RSVREG[2:0] is reported when the next valid packet is received.  
92  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
FSVREG - FIFO status register (Register address HA[7:0] = 2BH) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
Reserved  
TPER  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
0
Reserved  
TFOV  
TFUN TWMH  
Reserved  
RFOV RWMH RWML  
This register shows the interrupt source when the INT# signal is low level due to each status (except Reserved).  
When the interrupt source of each bit occurs, the corresponding bit is set to 1 and the INT# signal is made low level.  
When an interrupt occurs due to a source that is masked by the TIMR register or RIMR register, it sets the  
corresponding bit to 1 but does not cause the INT# signal to be made low level.  
If the SRRC bit of the MISCR register is set to 1, reading this register automatically clears all of its bits.  
Bit  
31:17  
Name  
Function  
Default  
Reserved  
16  
TPER  
Transmit FIFO parity error  
0
This is set to 1 if a parity error was detected in FIFO data for a transmit.  
15:11  
10  
Reserved  
TFOV  
TFUN  
Transmit FIFO overrun  
0
0
0
This is set to 1 if an overrun occurred in transmit FIFO.  
9
8
Transmit FIFO underrun  
This is set to 1 if an underrun occurred in transmit FIFO.  
TWMH  
Transmit full level exceeded  
This is set to 1 when the amount of data in transmit FIFO exceeds the value  
set in the TFWMH field of the TFIC1 register.  
7:3  
2
Reserved  
RFOV  
RWMH  
RWML  
Receive FIFO overflow  
0
0
0
If the amount of data in receive FIFO exceeds the receive FIFO capacity, it is  
considered an overflow and this bit is set to 1.  
1
0
Pause frame transmission level exceeded  
This bit is set to 1 if the amount of data in receive FIFO exceeds the value set  
in the RFWMH field of the RFIC1 register.  
Zero frame transmission level exceeded  
This bit is set to 1 if the amount of data in receive FIFO exceeds the value set  
in the RFWML field of the RFIC1 register.  
93  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
RFIC1 - Receive FIFO configuration register 1 (Register address HA[7:0] = 30H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
RFWMH  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
Reserved  
RFWML  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:29  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
28:16  
RFWMH  
Pause frame transmission level  
17FFH  
When the transmit flow control function is enabled, a pause frame that has the  
pause timer value that is set in the CFPT register is transmitted automatically  
if the amount of data in receive FIFO exceeds this value.  
15:13  
12:0  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
RFWML  
Zero frame transmission level  
0000H  
Once the transmit flow control function is enabled and the amount of data in  
receive FIFO exceeds the value set in the RFWMH field, a control frame in  
which the pause timer value is 0 is transmitted automatically if the amount of  
data becomes less than this value.  
Caution Observe the following expression when setting RFWML and  
RFWMH.  
0 RFWML < RFWMH 17FFH  
Caution Since RFWMH and RFWML are handled in word units, the lower 4 bits are ignored.  
Consequently, the setting values must be the values after the lower 4 bits are ignored and in the  
above range of settings.  
94  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
RFIC2 - Receive FIFO configuration register 2 (Register address HA[7:0] = 31H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
Reserved  
DDNB  
SIFT DCRCE FCRX  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:4  
3
Reserved  
Write 0.  
DDNB  
SIFT  
Dribble nibble discard  
1
1
If this bit is 1, dribble nibble packets are discarded.  
2
Short packet discard  
If this bit is 1, packets that are less than 64 bytes are discarded. Similarly, in  
the case of VLAN packets, packets that are less than 64 bytes are discarded.  
However, receive packets that are less than 16 bytes always are rejected.  
1
0
DCRCE  
FCRX  
CRC error packet discard  
1
1
If this bit is 1, packets that a CRC error or RX_ER occurred while receiving are  
discarded.  
Control packet discard  
If this bit is 1, pause control frames are discarded. Undefined control frames  
other than pause frames are not discarded.  
Caution If the RXFA signal is asserted using a threshold value (THRX field of the RFIC3 register), the  
above discard conditions cannot be used. Write 0 in all of them.  
95  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
RFIC3 - Receive FIFO configuration register 3 (Register address HA[7:0] = 32H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
THRX  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
Reserved  
RXETH  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:29  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
28:16  
THRX  
Receive completed threshold value  
1FFFH  
If receive data in receive FIFO exceeds this THRX threshold value, the RXFA  
signal is asserted. Use this threshold value when packet data that was  
received before a packet receive finishes completely needs to be read. When  
handling a Jumbo frame that exceeds 6 Kbytes, for example, one frame  
cannot be stored in the receive FIFO. Therefore, the RXFA signal is asserted  
by setting this threshold value. If EOF exists in the receive FIFO, the RXFA  
signal is asserted even if the receive data does not exceed this threshold  
value.  
Set this threshold value in a range of 0020H THRX 17FFH. If THRX =  
1FFFH, the RXFA signal is asserted when reception of one packet is  
completed.  
15:13  
12:0  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
RXETH  
Receive FIFO status display configuration  
1FFFH  
When receive data increases and the pointer of the receive FIFO exceeds this  
RXTH threshold value, the RXETH[7:0] signals are asserted. This is used to  
monitor the quantity of data in the receive FIFO at the higher side. The eight  
RXETH pins correspond to the corresponding port numbers.  
Set this threshold value in a range of 0020H THRX 17FFH. If RXETH =  
1FFFH, the RXETH[7:0] signals are not asserted.  
Caution Since the lower 4 bits of each field are ignored, the above setting ranges are established using  
values after the lower 4 bits are ignored.  
96  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
TFIC1 - Transmit FIFO configuration register 1 (Register address HA[7:0] = 33H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
Reserved  
TFWMH  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
Reserved  
TFDWL  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:29  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
28:16  
TFWMH  
Transmit full level  
1200H  
If the amount of data in transmit FIFO is less than or equal to this value, the  
µPD98433 makes the TXFBA[n] signal high level to show the host system that  
there is space in transmit FIFO. If the amount of data in transmit FIFO  
exceeds this value, it makes the TXFBA[n] signal low level.  
Set this value in the range from 0040H to 17FFH.  
15:13  
12:0  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
TFDWL  
Transmit drain level  
0600H  
If the amount of data in transmit FIFO exceeds this value, packet transmission  
begins.  
Set this value above collision window (HDREG:COLW+9) in the range from  
0040H to 17FFH.  
Caution Since TFWMH and TFDWL are handled in word units, the lower 4 bits are ignored.  
Consequently, the setting values must be the values after the lower 4 bits are ignored and the  
above range of settings.  
TFIC2 - Transmit FIFO configuration register 2 (Register address HA[7:0] = 34H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
0
Reserved  
DPAR  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:1  
0
Reserved  
Write 0.  
DPAR  
Transmit suspended due to transmit FIFO parity error  
0
If this bit is 1, transmission of a packet in which a parity error occurs is  
suspended.  
97  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
UFCR - User field configuration register (Register address HA[7:0] = 35H) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
UFCR[31:16]  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
UFCR[15:0]  
Bit  
Name  
UFCR  
Function  
Default  
0000 0000H  
31:0  
User field  
The value written in this register is output in RXFD[95:64] on output of status  
and RBYT fields. Set it to transmit user-defined information to a higher layer  
device.  
98  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
4.3 Global Registers  
Global registers are registers that are used to make settings and check status for all ports. When accessing a  
global register, only HA[7:0] of the address bus HA[10:0] is valid and HA[10:8] is ignored.  
STIR - Status information register (Register address HA[7:0] = FBH) Read only  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
P7TS  
P7RS  
P7FS  
P7CA  
P6TS  
P6RS  
P6FS  
P6CA  
P5TS  
P5RS  
P5FS  
P5CA  
P4TS  
P4RS  
P4FS  
P4CA  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
P3TS  
P3RS  
P3FS  
P3CA  
P2TS  
P2RS  
P2FS  
P2CA  
P1TS  
P1RS  
P1FS  
P1CA  
P0TS  
P0RS  
P0FS  
P0CA  
If any bit of the registers TSVREG, RSVREG, FSVREG, CAR1, and CAR2 established for each port is set to 1, the  
corresponding bit of this register is 1. Since this register shows the current state of each status register, when each  
status register is cleared, the corresponding bit of this register also is cleared. Reading this register does not clear  
each status register and does not deassert the INT# signal.  
(1/2)  
Bit  
Name  
P7TS  
Function  
Default  
31  
30  
29  
28  
Port 7 TSVREG status  
0
0
0
0
When any bit in the TSVREG register of port 7 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
P7RS  
P7FS  
P7CA  
Port 7 RSVREG status  
When any bit in the RSVREG register of port 7 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 7 FSVREG status  
When any bit in the FSVREG register of port 7 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 7 CAR status  
When any bit in the CAR1 or CAR2 register of port 7 is set to 1, this bit is set  
to 1.  
27  
26  
25  
24  
P6TS  
P6RS  
P6FS  
P6CA  
Port 6 TSVREG status  
0
0
0
0
When any bit in the TSVREG register of port 6 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 6 RSVREG status  
When any bit in the RSVREG register of port 6 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 6 FSVREG status  
When any bit in the FSVREG register of port 6 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 6 CAR status  
When any bit in the CAR1 or CAR2 register of port 6 is set to 1, this bit is set  
to 1.  
23  
22  
21  
20  
P5TS  
P5RS  
P5FS  
P5CA  
Port 5 TSVREG status  
0
0
0
0
When any bit in the TSVREG register of port 5 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 5 RSVREG status  
When any bit in the RSVREG register of port 5 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 5 FSVREG status  
When any bit in the FSVREG register of port 5 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 5 CAR status  
When any bit in the CAR1 or CAR2 register of port 5 is set to 1, this bit is set  
to 1.  
19  
P4TS  
Port 4 TSVREG status  
0
When any bit in the TSVREG register of port 4 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
99  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
(2/2)  
Bit  
Name  
P4RS  
Function  
Default  
18  
17  
16  
Port 4 RSVREG status  
0
0
0
When any bit in the RSVREG register of port 4 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
P4FS  
P4CA  
Port 4 FSVREG status  
When any bit in the FSVREG register of port 4 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 4 CAR status  
When any bit in the CAR1 or CAR2 register of port 4 is set to 1, this bit is set  
to 1.  
15  
14  
13  
12  
P3TS  
P3RS  
P3FS  
P3CA  
Port 3 TSVREG status  
0
0
0
0
When any bit in the TSVREG register of port 3 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 3 RSVREG status  
When any bit in the RSVREG register of port 3 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 3 FSVREG status  
When any bit in the FSVREG register of port 3 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 3 CAR status  
When any bit in the CAR1 or CAR2 register of port 3 is set to 1, this bit is set  
to 1.  
11  
10  
9
P2TS  
P2RS  
P2FS  
P2CA  
Port 2 TSVREG status  
0
0
0
0
When any bit in the TSVREG register of port 2 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 2 RSVREG status  
When any bit in the RSVREG register of port 2 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 2 FSVREG status  
When any bit in the FSVREG register of port 2 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
8
Port 2 CAR status  
When any bit in the CAR1 or CAR2 register of port 2 is set to 1, this bit is set  
to 1.  
7
6
5
4
P1TS  
P1RS  
P1FS  
P1CA  
Port 1 TSVREG status  
0
0
0
0
When any bit in the TSVREG register of port 1 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 1 RSVREG status  
When any bit in the RSVREG register of port 1 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 1 FSVREG status  
When any bit in the FSVREG register of port 1 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 1 CAR status  
When any bit in the CAR1 or CAR2 register of port 1 is set to 1, this bit is set  
to 1.  
3
2
1
0
P0TS  
P0RS  
P0FS  
P0CA  
Port 0 TSVREG status  
0
0
0
0
When any bit in the TSVREG register of port 0 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 0 RSVREG status  
When any bit in the RSVREG register of port 0 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 0 FSVREG status  
When any bit in the FSVREG register of port 0 is set to 1, this bit is set to 1.  
Port 0 CAR status  
When any bit in the CAR1 or CAR2 register of port 0 is set to 1, this bit is set  
to 1.  
100  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
MISCR - FIFO configuration register (Register address HA[7:0] = FCH) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
Reserved  
BUSMODE PSEL  
PEN  
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
0
Reserved  
INTEN  
Reserved  
SRRC  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:27  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
26  
BUSMODE  
PSEL  
FIFO I/F little endian/big endian selection  
If this bit is 0, it specifies little endian.  
If this bit is 1, it specifies big endian.  
0
0
25  
FIFO bus parity type selection  
If this bit is 1, it specifies odd parity.  
If this bit is 0, it specifies even parity.  
If the number of ‘1’ bits among the data bits and parity bits transferred in 1  
clock is an odd number, it is odd parity and if the number of ‘1’ bits is an even  
number, it is even parity. TXFDQ and RXFDQ are not an object.  
24  
23:9  
8
PEN  
FIFO bus parity enable  
0
0
0
If this bit is 1, parity is enabled.  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
INTEN  
Interrupt enable  
If 1, this enables the function of the INT# signal.  
7:1  
0
Reserved  
Write 0.  
SRRC  
Status register read clear configuration  
If 1, each status register is cleared by a read operation.  
101  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
CLKCHK – Clock Check register (Register address HA[7:0] = FDH) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
Reserved  
TXFCK RXFCK GTX_REF_CLK TX_CLK7 TX_CLK6 TX_CLK5 TX_CLK4 TX_CLK3 TX_CLK2 TX_CLK1 TX_CLK0  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RX_CLK71 RX_CLK61 RX_CLK51 RX_CLK41 RX_CLK31 RX_CLK21 RX_CLK11 RX_CLK01 RX_CLK70 RX_CLK60 RX_CLK50 RX_CLK40 RX_CLK30 RX_CLK20 RX_CLK10 RX_CLK00  
This register shows the input status of each clock. First, write FFFFFFFH to reset this register. Then, create an  
interval that is at least one cycle of the slowest clock signal. Subsequently, if 1 is read out when this register is read, it  
indicates that the clock corresponding to that bit is stopped.  
Note, however, that short-period clock stoppage, skipped clocks, and frequency abnormalities cannot be detected.  
Also, the bit corresponding to the clock of a port set to power-down mode is 1.  
Bit  
31:27  
Name  
Function  
Default  
Reserved  
Write 1 to these bits.  
26  
TXFCK  
Transmit FIFO bus clock  
1
1
1
1
1
1
When this bit is 1, the transmit FIFO bus clock is stopped.  
25  
RXFCK  
Receive FIFO bus clock  
When this bit is 1, the receive FIFO bus clock is stopped.  
24  
GTX_REF_CLK 1000 Mbps transmit clock  
When this bit is 1, the 1000 Mbps transmit clock is stopped.  
23:16  
15:8  
7:0  
TX_CLK[7:0]  
MII transmit clock  
When this bit is 1, the MII transmit clock is stopped.  
RX_CLK[7:0]1 Receive clock 1  
When this bit is 1, the receive clock is stopped.  
RX_CLK[7:0]0 Receive clock 0  
When this bit is 1, the receive clock 0 is stopped.  
VERID - Version register (Register address HA[7:0] = FEH) Read only  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
5
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
16  
0
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
1
Reserved  
VER  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:8  
7:0  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
VER  
Version number  
Consult an  
NEC  
This shows the version of the µPD98433.  
Electronics  
sales  
representative.  
102  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
POWD - Power down control register (Register address HA[7:0] = FFH) R/W  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
Reserved  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
P7  
P6  
P5  
P4  
P3  
P2  
P1  
P0  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
31:8  
7
Reserved  
Write 0.  
P7  
P6  
P5  
P4  
P3  
P2  
P1  
P0  
Port 7 power down  
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
This sets power down mode. Making this bit 1 cuts clock supply to the port  
block in the device.  
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Port 6 power down  
This sets power down mode. Making this bit 1 cuts clock supply to the port  
block in the device.  
Port 5 power down  
This sets power down mode. Making this bit 1 cuts clock supply to the port  
block in the device.  
Port 4 power down  
This sets power down mode. Making this bit 1 cuts clock supply to the port  
block in the device.  
Port 3 power down  
This sets power down mode. Making this bit 1 cuts clock supply to the port  
block in the device.  
Port 2 power down  
This sets power down mode. Making this bit 1 cuts clock supply to the port  
block in the device.  
Port 1 power down  
This sets power down mode. Making this bit 1 cuts clock supply to the port  
block in the device.  
Port 0 power down  
This sets power down mode. Making this bit 1 cuts clock supply to the port  
block in the device.  
103  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
4.4 PCS Configuration Registers  
The PCS configuration registers are a set of 16-bit wide registers that can be accessed via MII serial management.  
PYCNT - Control register (Register address RGAD[4:0] = 00H) R/W  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
RST Reserved SP0  
ANE  
Reserved  
RAN  
DM  
Reserved  
SP1  
Reserved  
Bit  
Name  
RST  
Function  
Default  
15  
PHY reset  
0
0
Setting this bit to 1 resets the “control register” and “status register” to default  
values. This bit is cleared automatically after a reset.  
14  
13  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
SP0  
Speed selection  
The combination of SP0 and SP1 selects the speed when operating in TBI  
mode. This is ignored when operating in MII or GMII mode.  
SP0 SP1  
Maximum operation frequency  
0
1
X
1
1
0
1000 Mbps  
Reserved  
Reserved  
12  
ANE  
Auto-negotiation enable  
0
Setting this bit to 1 enables auto-negotiation processing.  
11:10  
9
Reserved  
Write 0.  
RAN  
DM  
Auto-negotiation reset  
0
0
Setting this bit to 1 restarts auto-negotiation. However, auto-negotiation must  
be enabled. This bit is cleared automatically after a restart.  
8
Duplex mode  
Setting this bit to 1 makes operation full-duplex. A setting of 0 is designed for  
half-duplex operation, but at present a setting of 0 cannot be used.  
7
Reserved  
Write 0.  
6
SP1  
Speed selection  
See SP0  
0
5:0  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
104  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
PYSTS - Status register (Register address RGAD[4:0] = 01H) Read only  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
EXS Reserved NPRE  
AND  
RF  
ANA  
LKS Reserved EXA  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
15:9  
8
Reserved  
Write 0.  
EXS  
Extension status  
1
This bit shows that register 15 (extension status) contains further PHY status  
information. This bit is fixed to 1.  
7
6
Reserved  
Write 0.  
NPRE  
AND  
Management frame preamble suppression enable  
1
0
This bit shows that PHY can handle an MII management frame without a 32-  
bit preamble field. This bit is fixed to 1.  
5
4
Auto-negotiation complete  
If this bit is 1, it shows that auto-negotiation processing completed. If this bit is  
0, it shows that auto-negotiation is in processing or auto-negotiation function is  
disabled.  
RF  
Remote fault  
0
If this bit is 1, it shows that a remote fault was detected. When a remote fault  
is detected, this bit maintains 1 until a register read. This bit is cleared when  
the status register is read.  
3
2
ANA  
LKS  
Auto-negotiation ability  
1
0
This bit shows that the system has the ability to execute auto-negotiation. This  
bit is fixed to 1.  
Link status  
If this bit is 1, it shows that a valid link was established. If this bit is 0, it shows  
that a valid link could not be established. This bit maintains 0 until a register  
read if a link could not be established.  
1
0
Reserved  
Write 0.  
EXA  
Extended function  
1
This bit indicates that PHY has registers other than a control register (register  
0) and a status register (register 1). This bit is fixed to 1.  
105  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
PYANA - Auto-Negotiation Advertisement register (Register address RGAD[4:0] = 04H) R/W  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NP  
Reserved RF2  
RF1  
Reserved  
ASD  
PUS  
HD  
FD  
Reserved  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
15  
NP  
Next page  
0
If this bit is 1, it requests transmission of the next page or reports to the link  
partner that it has the ability to swap the next page. This bit can be set even if  
the local device does not have next page data if it wants to enable a next page  
receive. If there is no next page data on the local device and the link partner  
wants to transmit the next page, the local device must transmit a null message  
code as defined in Annex 28C. (A null message code is a message page that  
has the value 000_0000_0001B) Clear this bit when the local device does not  
want to swap the next page.  
14  
13  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
RF2  
RF1  
Remote fault  
00  
The remote fault conditions of the local device are encoded in bits 13:12 of the  
base page. Setting a remote fault to a value other than 00B and re-negotiating  
shows a link failure.  
Remote fault codes are as follows.  
12  
RF2 RF1  
Definition  
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
No errors, link OK  
Off-line  
Link failure  
Auto-negotiation error  
11:9  
8
Reserved  
Write 0.  
ASD  
PUS  
Pause  
00  
The pause ability of the local device is set in bits 8:7.  
The pause ability codes are as follows.  
ASD PUS  
Ability  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
No pauses  
7
Asymmetrical pause for link partner  
Symmetrical pause  
Both symmetrical pause and asymmetrical pause for local  
device  
See Table 4-1 for information about resolving the order of precedence with a  
link partner.  
6
HD  
FD  
Half-duplex  
0
1
Always write 0 in this bit.  
5
Full duplex  
Always write 1 in this bit.  
4:0  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
106  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
Table 4-1. Pause Order of Precedence Resolution Table  
Local Device  
Link Partner  
Local Resolution  
Link Partner Resolution  
PAUSE  
ASM_DIR  
0
PAUSE  
ASM_DIR  
X
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
X
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
Pause transmit disabled  
Pause receive disabled  
Pause transmit disabled  
Pause receive disabled  
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
X
0
1
X
X
0
1
X
Pause transmit disabled  
Pause receive disabled  
Pause transmit disabled  
Pause receive disabled  
Pause transmit disabled  
Pause receive disabled  
Pause transmit disabled  
Pause receive disabled  
Pause transmit enabled  
Pause receive disabled  
Pause transmit disabled  
Pause receive enabled  
Pause transmit disabled  
Pause receive disabled  
Pause transmit disabled  
Pause receive disabled  
Pause transmit enabled  
Pause receive enabled  
Pause transmit enabled  
Pause receive enabled  
Pause transmit disabled  
Pause receive disabled  
Pause transmit disabled  
Pause receive disabled  
Pause transmit disabled  
Pause receive enabled  
Pause transmit enabled  
Pause receive disabled  
Pause transmit enabled  
Pause receive enabled  
Pause transmit enabled  
Pause receive enabled  
107  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
PYANBP - Auto-Negotiation Link Partner Base Page Ability register (Register address RGAD[4:0] = 05H)  
Read only  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NP  
Reserved RF1  
RF0  
Reserved  
ASD  
PUS  
HD  
FD  
Reserved  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
15  
NP  
Next page  
0
A link partner asserts this bit to perform a next page transmit or to show its  
ability to receive the next page. If this bit is 0, the link partner does not have  
the next page or cannot receive the next page.  
14  
13  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
RF1  
RF0  
Remote fault  
00  
The remote fault conditions of a link partner are encoded in bits 13:12 of the  
base page. Remote fault codes are as follows.  
RF1 RF0  
Definition  
12  
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
No errors, link OK  
Off-line  
Link failure  
Auto-negotiation error  
11:9  
8
Reserved  
Write 0.  
ASD  
PUS  
Pause  
00  
The pause ability of a link partner is encoded in bits 8:7 of the base page.  
Pause ability codes are as follows.  
ASD PUS  
Ability  
7
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
No pause  
Asymmetrical pause for link partner  
Symmetrical pause  
Both symmetrical pause and asymmetrical pause for local  
device  
See Table 4-1 for information about resolving the order of precedence with a  
link partner.  
6
HD  
FD  
Half-duplex  
0
0
If this bit is 1, it shows that the link partner can operate in half-duplex mode. If  
this bit is 0, it shows that the link partner cannot operate in half-duplex mode.  
5
Full-duplex  
If this bit is 1, it shows that the link partner can operate in full-duplex mode. If  
this bit is 0, it shows that the link partner cannot operate in full-duplex mode.  
4:0  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
108  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
PYANEX - Auto-Negotiation extension register (Register address RGAD[4:0] = 06H) Read only  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Reserved  
NPA  
PRX Reserved  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
15:3  
2
Reserved  
Write 0.  
NPA  
PRX  
Next page available  
1
If this bit is 1, it shows that the local device supports the next page function.  
This bit is fixed to 1.  
1
0
Page receive  
0
If this bit is 1, it shows that a new page was received and its value was written  
to the PYANBP register or PYANLPN register appropriately. After a page  
receive, this bit maintains 1 until it is read. This bit is cleared by a register  
read.  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
PYANNP - Auto-Negotiation Next Page Transmit register (Register address RGAD[4:0] = 07H) R/W  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NP  
Reserved  
MP  
AK2  
TGL  
MSGUFC  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
15  
NP  
Next page  
0
If this bit is 1, it shows that there is an additional next page. Clear it to show  
that this page is the last page.  
14  
13  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
MP  
Message page  
0
0
If this bit is 1, it shows a message page. Clear the bit to show an unformatted  
page.  
12  
11  
AK2  
Acknowledge 2  
This is used by the next page function to show that a device has the ability to  
reply to messages. If this bit is 1, the local device replies to messages. Clear  
the bit if the local device cannot reply to messages.  
TGL  
Toggle  
0
This is used for page synchronization with a link partner between next page  
swaps. This bit always takes the inverse of the value of the toggle bit of the  
link code swapped immediately before. The initial value of the next page that  
is transmitted first is the inverse of bit 11 of the base link code.  
10:0  
MSGUFC  
Message/Unformat code field  
000H  
A message page is a formatted page that carries defined message codes.  
Message types are enumerated in IEEE 802.3 Annex 28C. The unformat code  
field takes arbitrary values.  
109  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
PYANLPN - Auto-Negotiation Link Partner Ability Next Page register (Register address RGAD[4:0] = 08H)  
Read only  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
NP  
Reserved  
MP  
AK2  
TGL  
MSGUFC  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
15  
NP  
Next page  
If this bit is 1, a link partner set this bit to show that there continues to be an  
0
additional next page. If this bit is 0, it shows that this is the last next page from  
the link partner.  
14  
13  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
MP  
Message page  
0
0
If this bit is 1, it shows a message page. If this bit is 0, it shows an  
unformatted page.  
12  
11  
AK2  
Acknowledge 2  
This shows the ability of the link partner to reply to messages. If this bit is 1, it  
shows that the link partner has the ability to reply to massages. If this bit is 0,  
it shows that the link partner cannot reply to messages.  
TGL  
Toggle  
0
This is used for page synchronization with a link partner between next page  
swaps. This bit always takes the inverse of the value of the toggle bit of the  
link code swapped immediately before. The initial value of the next page that  
is transmitted first is the inverse of bit 11 of the base link code.  
10:0  
MSGUFC  
Message/Unformat code field  
000H  
A message page is a formatted page that carries defined message codes.  
Message types are enumerated in IEEE 802.3 Annex 28C. The unformat code  
field takes arbitrary values.  
110  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
PYEX - Extension status register (Register address RGAD[4:0] = 0FH) Read only  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
GXF  
GXH  
GTF  
GTH  
Reserved  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
15  
GXF  
GXH  
GTF  
GTH  
1000BASE-X full-duplex  
This bit is fixed to 1.  
1
0
1
0
1: Shows that PHY can operate in 1000BASE-X full-duplex mode.  
0: Shows that PHY cannot operate in 1000BASE-X full-duplex mode.  
14  
1000BASE-X half-duplex  
This bit is fixed to 0.  
1: Shows that PHY can operate in 1000BASE-X half-duplex mode.  
0: Shows that PHY cannot operate in 1000BASE-X half-duplex mode.  
13  
1000BASE-T full-duplex  
This bit is fixed to 1.  
1: Shows that PHY can operate in 1000BASE-T full-duplex mode.  
0: Shows that PHY cannot operate in 1000BASE-T full-duplex mode.  
12  
1000BASE-T half-duplex  
This bit is fixed to 0.  
1: Shows that PHY can operate in 1000BASE-T half-duplex mode.  
0: Shows that PHY cannot operate in 1000BASE-T half-duplex mode.  
11:0  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
111  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
PYJTR - Jitter diagnosis register (Register address RGAD[4:0] = 10H) R/W  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
JDE  
JPS  
Reserved  
CJP  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
15  
JDE  
JPS  
Jitter diagnosis enable  
If this bit is 1, the function that transmits jitter test patterns defined in IEEE  
0
802.3 Annex 36A can be used. Clear this bit to make it possible to use normal  
transmit operations. The default value is 0.  
14:12  
Jitter pattern selection  
00  
This selects the jitter pattern to transmit in jitter diagnosis mode.  
JPS14 JPS13 JPS12  
Jitter Pattern  
Jitter pattern defined in CJP[9:0]  
1010101010......  
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
01011111001010000011......  
1111100000......  
0101111100001100100100111001011010100011......  
0001111100......  
None  
None  
11:10  
9:0  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
CJP  
Custom jitter pattern  
000H  
This is used with jitter pattern selection and jitter diagnosis enable. A custom  
pattern that is transmitted continuously is set in this field.  
112  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 4 REGISTER DESCRIPTION  
PYTBIC - TBI control register (Register address RGAD[4:0] = 11H) R/W  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
SRT Reserved DRD  
DTD  
DEF  
Reserved  
ANS  
Reserved  
RCKSEL GMII/MII  
Reserved  
ERAP CDET  
Bit  
Name  
Function  
Default  
0
15  
SRT  
Software reset  
This bit resets the function module in the TBI. Clear this bit to perform normal  
operations. The default value is 0.  
14  
13  
Reserved  
Write 0.  
DRD  
DTD  
DEF  
Receive running disparity invalid  
0
If this bit is 1, it prohibits use of running disparity calculation and checking in a  
receive. For normal operation, clear this bit.  
12  
11  
Running disparity invalid  
0
0
If this bit is 1, it prohibits use of running disparity calculation and checking in a  
transmit. For normal operation, clear this bit.  
Elastic FIFO error status  
This bit is set to 1 if an error occurs in the elastic FIFO. After the error occurs,  
this bit remains 1 until it is read. This bit is cleared when the register is read.  
Write 0 to this bit when PYTBIC is set. This bit is a read-only bit.  
10:9  
8
Reserved  
Write 0.  
ANS  
Auto-negotiation sense  
0
Set this bit in order to enable the auto-negotiation function to detect gigabit  
MAC operating in auto-negotiation bypass mode or gigabit MAC without the  
foregoing auto-negotiation ability. Auto-negotiation complete becomes 1 when  
this is detected. However, page receive becomes 0, which shows that pages  
are not being swapped. Clear this bit if IEEE 802.3 Clause 37 operation is  
requested. Doing so terminates without establishing a link.  
7:6  
5
Reserved  
Write 0.  
RCKSEL  
Receive clock selection  
0
If this bit is 1, it is set so that a 125 MHz clock can be input from  
SERDES/PHY. In GMII mode, the 125 MHz clock must be physically  
connected to PMA_RX_CLK[0] (RX_CLKn[0]). Clear this bit in order to input a  
two-phase 62.5 MHz receive clock in the TBI.  
4
GMII/MII  
GMII/MII mode  
0
If this bit is 1, it connects to GMII PHY or MII PHY and sets the TBI to GMII/MII  
mode. Clear this bit when connecting to 1000BASE-X SERDES.  
3
2
1
Reserved  
Write 0.  
Reserved  
Write 1.  
ERAP  
WRAP enable  
0
This sets SERDES to loopback mode. Clear this bit to perform normal  
operation.  
0
CDET  
Comma detection enable  
0
If this bit is 1, it enables SERDES to execute code alignment detection based  
on comma detection.  
113  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
Statistics counter map  
(1/2)  
Register Address  
HA[7:0]  
Name  
Function  
R/W  
Default  
80H  
81H  
82H  
83H  
84H  
85H  
86H  
87H  
88H  
89H  
8AH  
8BH  
8CH  
8DH  
8EH  
8FH  
90H  
91H  
92H  
93H  
94H  
95H  
96H  
97H to 9FH  
A0H  
A1H  
A2H  
A3H  
A4H  
A5H  
A6H  
A7H  
A8H  
R64  
64-byte frame receive counter  
65- to 127-byte frame receive counter  
128- to 255-byte frame receive counter  
256- to 511-byte frame receive counter  
512- to 1023-byte frame receive counter  
1024- to 1518-byte frame receive counter  
1519- to LMAX frame receive counter  
Byte receive counter  
R/W  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
R127  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R255  
R511  
R1K  
RMAX  
REXD  
RBYT  
RPKT  
RFCS  
RMCA  
RBCA  
RXCF  
RXPF  
RXUO  
RALN  
RFLR  
RCDE  
RCSE  
RUND  
ROVR  
RFRG  
RJBR  
Packet receive counter  
FCS error receive counter  
Multicast packet receive counter  
Broadcast packet receive counter  
Control frame receive counter  
Pause frame receive counter  
Undefined control frame receive counter  
Alignment error receive counter  
Data length mismatch receive counter  
Code error receive counter  
False Carrier receive counter  
Short packet receive counter  
Oversize packet receive counter  
Error short packet receive counter  
Jabber packet receive counter  
Reserved  
T64  
64-byte frame transmit counter  
65- to 127-byte frame transmit counter  
128- to 255-byte frame transmit counter  
256- to 511-byte frame transmit counter  
512- to 1023-byte frame transmit counter  
1024- to 1518-byte frame transmit counter  
1519- to LMAX frame transmit counter  
Byte transmit counter  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
T127  
T255  
T511  
T1K  
TMAX  
TEXD  
TBYT  
TPKT  
Packet transmit counter  
Caution Do not access addresses that are “Reserved”.  
114  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
(2/2)  
Register Address  
HA[7:0]  
Name  
Function  
R/W  
Default  
A9H  
TMCA  
Multicast packet transmit counter  
Broadcast packet transmit counter  
Pause control frame transmit counter  
Transmit delay counter  
R/W  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
AAH  
ABH  
ACH  
ADH  
AEH  
AFH  
TBCA  
TXPF  
TDFR  
TEDF  
TSCL  
TMCL  
TLCL  
TXCL  
TNCL  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
Transmit excessive delay counter  
Single collision packet transmit counter  
Multiple collision packet transmit counter  
Late collision counter  
B0H  
B1H  
Excessive collisions counter  
Total collisions counter  
B2H  
B3H  
Reserved  
B4H  
TDRP  
TJBR  
TFCS  
TXCF  
TOVR  
TUND  
TFRG  
Transmit discard frame (transmit FIFO underrun) counter  
Jabber frame transmit counter  
FCS error frame transmit counter  
Control frame transmit counter  
Oversize frame transmit counter  
Short packet transmit counter  
Error short packet transmit counter  
Reserved  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
R/W  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
B5H  
B6H  
B7H  
B8H  
B9H  
BAH  
BB to BF  
C0H  
RDRP  
TFPE  
Receive discard counter (Receive FIFO overflow)  
Transmit FIFO bus parity error counter  
Reserved  
R/W  
R/W  
0000 0000H  
0000 0000H  
C1H  
C2H to CBH  
Caution Do not access addresses that are “Reserved”.  
115  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
R64 - 64-byte frame receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 80H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
R64(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
R64(15:0)  
R64 counts the number of 64-byte long receive frames. Receive frames include normal receive frames and receive  
frames that have errors. (Preamble and SFD are excluded from the frame length, but the FCS field is included.)  
R127 - 65- to 127-byte frame receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 81H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
R127(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
R127(15:0)  
R127 counts the number of 65-byte to 127-byte long receive frames. Receive frames include normal receive  
frames and receive frames that have errors. (Preamble and SFD are excluded from the frame length, but the FCS  
field is included.)  
R255 - 128- to 255-byte frame receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 82H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
R255(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
R255(15:0)  
R255 counts the number of 128-byte to 255-byte long receive frames. Receive frames include normal receive  
frames and receive frames that have errors. (Preamble and SFD are excluded from the frame length, but the FCS  
field is included.)  
R511 - 256- to 511-byte frame receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 83H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
R511(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
R511(15:0)  
R511 counts the number of 256-byte to 511-byte long receive frames. Receive frames include normal receive  
frames and receive frames that have errors. (Preamble and SFD are excluded from the frame length, but the FCS  
field is included.)  
116  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
R1K - 512- to 1023-byte frame receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 84H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
R1K(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
R1K(15:0)  
R1K counts the number of 512-byte to 1023-byte long receive frames. Receive frames include normal receive  
frames and receive frames that have errors. (Preamble and SFD are excluded from the frame length, but the FCS  
field is included.)  
RMAX - 1024- to 1518-byte frame receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 85H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
RMAX(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
RMAX(15:0)  
RMAX counts the number of 1024-byte to 1518-byte long receive frames. Receive frames include normal receive  
frames and receive frames that have errors. (Preamble and SFD are excluded from the frame length, but the FCS  
field is included.)  
REXD - 1519- to LMAX frame receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 86H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
REXD(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
REXD(15:0)  
When HUGEN of the MACC2 register is cleared to 0, this counter counts 1519 bytes to the maximum frame length  
set to the LMAX register. When HUGEN of the MACC2 register is set to 1, this counter counts the number of receive  
frames of 1519 bytes or more. This counter also counts receive frames that contain an error.  
RBYT - Byte receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 87H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RBYT(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
RBYT(15:0)  
RBYT counts the number of receive bytes of a received frame. This counter also counts incorrect packets. The  
count value does not include Preamble and SFD. However, the FCS byte is included.  
117  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
RPKT - Packet receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 88H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RPKT(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
RPKT(15:0)  
RPKT counts the number of packets received. This counter also counts incorrect packets. In addition, it counts all  
unicast, multicast, and broadcast packets.  
RFCS - FCS error receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 89H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RFCS(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
RFCS(15:0)  
RFCS counts the number of complete 64-octet to 1518-octet long packets received that contain frame check  
sequence errors.  
RMCA - Multicast packet receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 8AH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RMCA(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
RMCA(15:0)  
RMCA counts the number of 64-octet to 1518-octet long (non-VLAN) frames or 64-octet to 1522-octet long (VLAN)  
normal multicast frames received. Broadcast frames are not included.  
RBCA - Broadcast packet receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 8BH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RBCA(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
RBCA(15:0)  
RBCA counts the number of 64-octet to 1518-octet long (non-VLAN) or 64-octet to 1522-octet long (VLAN) normal  
broadcast frames received. Multicast frames are not included.  
118  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
RXCF - Control frame receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 8CH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RXCF(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
RXCF(15:0)  
RXCF counts the number of MAC control frames (length/type field is 8808H) received. Unsupported commands  
except for pause frame are included.  
RXPF - Pause frame receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 8DH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RXPF(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
RXPF(15:0)  
RXPF counts the number of valid pause MAC control frames (valid destination address, length/type field is 8808H,  
correct pause opcode is 0001H) received.  
RXUO - Undefined control frame receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 8EH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
RXUO(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
RXUO(15:0)  
RXUO counts the number of MAC control frames (length/type field is 8808H, correct pause opcode is not 0001H)  
received.  
RALN - Alignment error receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 8FH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RALN(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
RALN(15:0)  
RALN counts the number of 64-octet to 1518-octet long receive frames that have an invalid FCS and octet unit  
fractions.  
119  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
RFLR - Data length mismatch receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 90H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RFLR(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
RFLR(15:0)  
RFLR counts the number of cases in which the data length of frames actually received does not match the length  
field value. Invalid IEEE802.3 length field values (non-VLAN: except 46-1500 byte, VLAN: except 42-1500 byte) are  
not counted. It checks data length when the LENCK bit of the MACC2 register is 1.  
RCDE - Code error receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 91H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RCDE(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
RCDE(15:0)  
RCDE is counted if an illegal data symbol is detected at least once while carrier is detected.  
RCSE - False Carrier receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 92H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RCSE(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
RCSE(15:0)  
RCSE is counted after receiving the next packet when False Carrier occurs while idle. False Carrier is counted only  
once even if it occurs multiple times while idle.  
RUND - Short packet receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 93H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RUND(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
RUND(15:0)  
RUND is counted when a receive packet is less than 64-byte long and includes a valid FCS field.  
120  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
ROVR - Oversize packet receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 94H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
ROVR(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
ROVR(15:0)  
When HUGEN of the MACC2 register is cleared to 0, this counter counts the number of frames that exceeds the  
maximum frame length set to the LMAX register. It also counts receive frames that contain an error.  
When HUGEN of the MACC2 register is set to 1, this counter counts nothing.  
RFRG - Error short packet receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 95H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RFRG(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
RFRG(15:0)  
RFRG is counted when a receive packet is less than 64-byte long and contains an FCS error.  
RJBR - Jabber packet receive counter (Register address HA[7:0] = 96H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
RJBR(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
RJBR(15:0)  
RJBR counts when a receive packet exceeds 1518 octets in length and contains an FCS error.  
T64 - 64-byte frame transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = A0H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
T64(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
T64(15:0)  
T64 counts the number of 64-byte long transmit frames. Transmit frames include normal transmit frames and  
transmit frames that have errors. (Preamble and SFD are excluded from the frame length, but the FCS field is  
included.)  
121  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
T127 - 65- to 127-byte frame transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = A1H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
T127(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
T127(15:0)  
T127 counts the number of 65-byte to 127-byte long transmit frames. Transmit frames include normal transmit  
frames and transmit frames that have errors. (Preamble and SFD are excluded from the frame length, but the FCS  
field is included.)  
T255 - 128- to 255-byte frame transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = A2H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
T255(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
T255(15:0)  
T255 counts the number of 128-byte to 255-byte long transmit frames. Transmit frames include normal transmit  
frames and transmit frames that have errors. (Preamble and SFD are excluded from the frame length, but the FCS  
field is included.)  
T511 - 256- to 511-byte frame transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = A3H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
T511(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
T511(15:0)  
T511 counts the number of 256-byte to 511-byte long transmit frames. Transmit frames include normal transmit  
frames and transmit frames that have errors. (Preamble and SFD are excluded from the frame length, but the FCS  
field is included.)  
T1K - 512- to 1023-byte frame transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = A4H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
T1K(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
T1K(15:0)  
T1K counts the number of 512-byte to 1023-byte long transmit frames. Transmit frames include normal transmit  
frames and transmit frames that have errors. (Preamble and SFD are excluded from the frame length, but the FCS  
field is included.)  
122  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
TMAX - 1024- to 1518-byte frame transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = A5H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
TMAX(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
TMAX(15:0)  
TMAX counts the number of 1024-byte to 1518-byte long transmit frames. Transmit frames include normal transmit  
frames and transmit frames that have errors. (Preamble and SFD are excluded from the frame length, but the FCS  
field is included.)  
TEXD - 1519- to LMAX frame transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = A6H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
TEXD(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
TEXD(15:0)  
When HUGEN of the MACC2 register is cleared to 0, this counter counts the number of frames from 1519 bytes to  
the maximum frame length set to the LMAX register. If an attempt is made to transmit a packet exceeding the  
maximum frame length, this counter counts nothing, but TOVR counts the packet.  
When HUGEN of the MACC2 register is set to 1, this counter counts the number of transmit frames of 1591 bytes  
or more. This counter also counts transmit frames that contain an error.  
TBYT - Byte transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = A7H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TBYT(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
TBYT(15:0)  
TBYT counts the number of bytes of transmit packets. When a collision occurs before transmission completes or  
aborts, the number of transmit bytes when the collision occurs also is counted. Those of the preamble and SFD are  
not counted.  
123  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
TPKT - Packet transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = A8H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TPKT(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
TPKT(15:0)  
TPKT is counted for every packet transmission. It includes packets in which errors occur, all unicast packets, all  
multicast packets, and broadcast packets.  
TMCA - Multicast packet transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = A9H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TMCA(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
TMCA(15:0)  
TMCA is counted when a multicast packet is transmitted. Broadcast packets are not included. Aborted frames and  
frames that have CRC errors are not counted.  
TBCA - Broadcast packet transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = AAH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TBCA(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
TBCA(15:0)  
TBCA is counted when a broadcast packet is transmitted. Aborted frames and frames that have CRC errors are  
not counted.  
TXPF - Pause control frame transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = ABH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TXPF(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
TXPF(15:0)  
TXPF is counted whenever a pause control frame is transmitted by the µPD98433 pause control frame transmit  
function or FCn input.  
124  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
TDFR - Transmit delay counter (Register address HA[7:0] = ACH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TDFR(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
TDFR(15:0)  
TDFR is counted when a transmit delay occurs due to carrier detection when trying to start transmission. This  
counter is not counted if a collision occurs during a transmit started after a delay occurs. This counter is counted only  
when the transmit succeeds.  
TEDF - Transmit excessive delay counter (Register address HA[7:0] = ADH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TEDF(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
TEDF(15:0)  
TEDF is counted when transmission is aborted due to excessive delay (transmit delay exceeds 3036 byte time).  
TSCL - Single collision packet transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = AEH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
TSCL(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
TSCL(15:0)  
TSCL is counted when transmission succeeds after one collision occurs during transmission.  
TMCL - Multiple collision packet transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = AFH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
TMCL(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
TMCL(15:0)  
TMCL is counted when transmission succeeds after collisions (including late collisions) occur multiple times (2 to  
15 times) within a range specified by the RTMAX field of the HDREG register during transmission.  
125  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
TLCL - Late collisions counter (Register address HA[7:0] = B0H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TLCL(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
TLCL(15:0)  
TLCL is counted when a late collision occurs on transfer.  
TXCL - Excessive collisions counter (Register address HA[7:0] = B1H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TXCL(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
TXCL(15:0)  
TXCL is counted when more collisions than the RTMAX field of the HDREG register occur during transmission and  
transmission is aborted.  
TNCL - Total collisions counter (Register address HA[7:0] = B2H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
4
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TNCL(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
TNCL(15:0)  
TNCL counts the total number of times that collisions occur when transmission succeeds after collisions occur.  
This counter does not include excessive collision conditions.  
TDRP - Transmit discard frame (Transmit FIFO underrun) counter (Register address HA[7:0] = B4H)  
Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
0
TDRP(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
TDRP(15:0)  
TDRP counts the number of packets discarded on transmission.  
126  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
TJBR - Jabber frame transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = B5H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TJBR(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
TJBR(15:0)  
TJBR counts when a packet that exceeds 1518 octets and has an incorrect FCS is transmitted.  
TFCS - FCS error packet transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = B6H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TFCS(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
TFCS(15:0)  
TFCS counts when a valid sized packet (non-VLAN: 64-1518 byte, VLAN: 64-1522 byte) that has an incorrect FCS  
value is transmitted.  
TXCF - Control frame transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = B7H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TXCF(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
TXCF(15:0)  
TXCF counts valid length control frames that have a type field indicating a control frame.  
TOVR - Oversize frame transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = B8H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TOVR(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
TOVR(15:0)  
When HUGEN of the MACC2 register is cleared to 0, this counter counts the number of transmit frames exceeding  
the maximum frame length set to the IMAX register. It also counts transmit frames that contain an error.  
When HUGEN of the MACC2 register is set to 1, it counts nothing.  
127  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 5 STATISTICS COUNTERS  
TUND - Short packet transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = B9H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
3
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TUND(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
TUND(15:0)  
TUND counts the number of frames of less than 64 bytes that have a correct FCS.  
TFRG - Error short packet transmit counter (Register address HA[7:0] = BAH) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
2
17  
1
16  
0
TFRG(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
TFRG(15:0)  
TFRG counts the number of frames of less than 64 bytes that have an incorrect FCS.  
RDRP - Receive discard (Receive FIFO overflow) counter (Register address HA[7:0] = C0H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
16  
0
RDRP(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
RDRP(15:0)  
This counter counts the number of frames by which an overflow occurs in the receive FIFO, or the number of  
frames discarded by the filtering condition.  
TFPE - Transmit FIFO bus parity error counter (Register address HA[7:0] = C1H) Read/Write  
31  
30  
29  
28  
27  
26  
25  
24  
23  
22  
21  
20  
19  
18  
17  
1
16  
0
TFPE(31:16)  
15  
14  
13  
12  
11  
10  
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
TFPE(15:0)  
TFPE counts the number of frames in which parity errors occur in transmit data given by the transmit FIFO bus.  
This counter also counts the number of frames in which a parity error occurs because of transmit FIFO overrun.  
128  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
The µPD98433 has a JTAG boundary scan circuit.  
6.1 Features  
Conforms to IEEE1149.1 JTAG Boundary Scan Standard.  
Three registers dedicated to boundary scan  
• Instruction register  
• Bypass register  
• Boundary scan register  
Three instructions supported  
• BYPASS instruction  
• EXTEST instruction  
• SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction  
Five pins dedicated to boundary scan  
• TCK (JTAG Test Clock)  
• TMS (JTAG Test Mode Select)  
• TDI (JTAG Test Data Input)  
• TDO (JTAG Test Data Output)  
• TRST# (JTAG Reset)  
129  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
6.2 Internal Configuration of Boundary Scan Circuit  
Figure 6-1 shows the block diagram of the internal JTAG boundary scan circuit of the µPD98433.  
Figure 6-1. Block Diagram of Boundary Scan Circuit  
Boundary scan register  
Bypass register  
MUX  
TDO  
Output buffer  
TDI  
Instruction decoder  
Instruction register  
TMS  
TCK  
TAP  
controller  
TRST#  
6.2.1 Instruction register  
The instruction register consists of a 2-bit shift register and writes instruction data from the TDI pin. The register  
and instruction are selected by this instruction data.  
6.2.2 TAP (Test Access Port) controller  
The TAP controller changes operating state by latching the signal of the TMS pin at the rising edge of the clock  
input to the TCK pin.  
6.2.3 Bypass register  
The bypass register consists of a 1-bit shift register connected between the TDI and TDO pins when the TAP  
controller is in Shift-DR state. If this register is selected while the TAP controller is in Shift-DR state, data is shifted to  
the TDO pin at the rising edge of the clock input to the TCK pin.  
When this register is selected, the operation of the JTAG boundary circuit does not influence on the operation of  
the µPD98433.  
6.2.4 Boundary scan register  
The boundary scan register is located between an external pin of the µPD98433 and internal logic circuit. When  
this register is selected, data is latched or loaded by the instruction of the TAP controller.  
If this register is selected while the TAP controller is in Shift-DR state, data is output to the TDO pin starting from  
the LSB at the falling edge of the clock input to the TCK pin.  
130  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
6.3 Pin Function  
6.3.1 TCK (JTAG Test Clock) pin  
The TCK pin is used to supply a clock signal to the JTAG boundary scan circuit (such as the bypass register,  
instruction register, and TAP controller. This clock signal is isolated so as not to be supplied to the other internal  
circuits of the µPD98433.  
6.3.2 TMS (JTAG Test Mode Select) pin  
Input to the TMS signal is latched at the rising edge of the clock input to the TCK pin and defines the operation of  
the TAP controller.  
6.3.3 TDI (JTAG Test Data Input) pin  
The TDI pin is an input pin that inputs data to the JTAG boundary scan circuit register.  
6.3.4 TDO (JTAG Test Data Output) pin  
The TDO pin is an output pin that outputs data from the JTAG boundary scan circuit.  
This pin changes its output at the falling edge of the clock input to the TCK pin. This pin is a three-state output pin  
and is controlled by the TAP controller.  
6.3.5 TRST# (JTAG Reset) pin  
This pin asynchronously initializes the TAP controller. This reset signal sets the µPD98433 in the normal operating  
mode and the boundary register in non-operating state.  
131  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
6.4 Operation Description  
6.4.1 TAP controller  
The TAP controller is a circuit having 16 states synchronized with changes of the TMS and TCK pins. Its operation  
is specified by IEEE Standard 1149.1.  
6.4.2 TAP controller state  
Figure 6-2 shows the state transition of the TAP controller. The state of the TAP controller is determined  
depending on the state of the TMS pin signal input at the rising edge of the clock input to the TCK pin. The operations  
of the instruction register, boundary scan register, and bypass register change at the rising or falling edge of the clock  
input to the TCK pin. (Refer to Figure 6-3).  
Figure 6-2. State Transition of TAP Controller  
(1) Test-Logic-Reset  
H
L
H
H
H
(2) Run-Test/Idle  
L
(3) Select-DR-Scan  
(4) Select-IR-Scan  
L
L
(11) Capture-IR  
L
H
H
(5) Capture-DR  
L
(6) Shift-DR  
(12) Shift-IR  
L
H
L
H
H
H
(7) Exit1-DR  
(13) Exit1-IR  
L
L
(8) Pause-DR  
(14) Pause-IR  
H
H
L
L
L
L
(9) Exit2-DR  
(15) Exit2-IR  
H
H
(10) Update-DR  
H
(16) Update-IR  
L
L
H
Remarks 1. “H” and “L” of the arrows indicating state transition in the above figure indicate the state of the TMS  
pin at the rising edge of the clock input to the TCK pin.  
2. Numbers in parentheses in the above figure correspond to the explanation below.  
132  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
Figure 6-3. Operation Timing in Controller State  
TCK  
Controller state  
Enters state  
Starts in state  
Starts in state  
at falling edge of TCK pin  
at rising edge of TCK pin  
(1) Test-Logic-Reset  
The JTAG boundary scan circuit does not affect the normal operation of the µPD98433 in this controller status.  
This is because the bypass instruction is stored to the instruction register and executed on initialization. The  
TAP controller enters the Test-Logic-Reset state if the TMS pin holds the high level for the duration of at least  
five rising edges of the TCK pin signal, regardless of the current state of the controller. The TAP controller  
holds this state for the duration in which the TMS pin signal high.  
If the TAP controller must be in the Test-Logic-Reset state, the controller returns to the original Test-Logic-  
Reset state even if a low-level signal is input once to the TMS pin by mistake (due to, for example, the influence  
of the external interface), if the TMS pin signal holds its high level status for the duration of three rising edges  
of the TCK pin signal.  
The operation of the test logic does not hinder the logic operation of the µPD98433 due to the above error.  
When the TAP controller exits from the Test-Logic-Reset state, the controller enters the Run-Test/Idle state. In  
this state, no operation is performed because the current instruction is set by the operation of the bypass  
register. The logic operation of the JTAG boundary scan circuit is inactive even in the Select-DR-Scan and  
Select-IR-Scan states.  
(2) Run-Test/Idle  
The TAP controller is in this state during scan operation (in Select-DR-Scan or Select-IR-Scan state). Once the  
controller has entered this state and if the TMS pin signal holds the low level, the controller remains in this  
state. The controller enters the Select-DR-Scan state if the TMS pin signal holds high level at one rising edge  
of the TCK pin signal.  
All the test data registers (boundary register and bypass register) selected by the current instruction hold the  
previous status (Idle). While the TAP controller is in this state, the instruction does not change.  
(3) Select-DR-Scan  
This is a temporary boundary scan state. The boundary scan register and bypass register selected by the  
current instruction hold the previous state.  
If the TMS pin signal is held low at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal while the TAP controller is in this state,  
the controller enters the Capture-DR state, and scan sequence to the selected registers is started.  
If the TMS pin signal is held high at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal, the TAP controller enters the Select-  
IR-Scan state. While the controller is in this state, the instruction does not change.  
133  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
(4) Select-IR-Scan  
This is a temporary boundary scan state. The boundary scan register and bypass register selected by the  
current instruction hold the previous state.  
If the TMS pin signal is held low at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal while the TAP controller is in this state,  
the controller enters the Capture-IR state, and scan sequence to the selected registers is started.  
If the TMS pin signal is held high at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal, the TAP controller enters the Test-  
Logic-Reset state. While the controller is in this state, the instruction does not change.  
(5) Capture-DR  
In this controller state, data is loaded to the boundary scan register selected by the current instruction in  
parallel at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal. (In this case, load the data from the input pin of each device to  
the corresponding boundary scan register at the same time.) While the TAP controller is in this state, the  
instruction does not change.  
If the TAP controller is in this state at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal, the controller enters the following  
state:  
• If the TMS pin signal is held high: Exit1-DR state  
• If the TMS pin signal is held low: Shift-DR state  
(6) Shift-DR  
In this controller state, TDI and TDO are connected (at either of the boundary scan register of bypass register)  
by the current instruction. The shift data is shifted one state at a time toward the serial output direction at each  
rising edge of the TCK pin signal.  
The boundary scan register or bypass register selected by the current instruction holds the previous status  
without change if the controller is not on the serial bus (not in the Shift-DR state). While the controller is in this  
state, the instruction does not change.  
If the TAP controller is in this state at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal, the controller enters the following  
state:  
• If the TMS pin signal is held high: Exit1-DR state  
• If the TMS pin signal is held low: Shift-DR state  
(7) Exit1-DR  
This is a temporary controller state. If the TMS pin signal is held high at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal  
with the TAP controller in this state, the controller enters the Update-DR state. This ends the scan process.  
If the TMS pin signal is held low at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal, the TAP controller enters the Pause-  
DR state.  
Both the bypass register and boundary scan register selected by the current instruction hold the previous  
status without change. While the TAP controller is in this state, the instruction does not change.  
(8) Pause-DR  
In this controller state, shifting between TDI and TDO connected by either the bypass register or boundary  
scan register is temporarily stopped. These registers selected by the current instruction hold the previous state  
without change.  
The TAP controller remains in this state while the TMS pin signal is low. If the TMS pin signal is held high at  
the rising edge of the TCK pin signal, the TAP controller enters the Exit2-DR state. While the TAP controller is  
in this state, the instruction does not change.  
134  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
(9) Exit2-DR  
This is a temporary controller state. If the TMS pin signal is held high at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal  
with the TAP controller in this state, the controller enters the Update-DR state. This ends the scan process.  
If the TMS pin signal is held low at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal, the TAP controller enters the Shift-DR  
state.  
Both the bypass register and boundary scan register selected by the current instruction hold the previous  
status without change. While the TAP controller is in this state, the instruction does not change.  
(10) Update-DR  
The boundary scan register has a parallel output latch to prevent changes in parallel output (while shifted to  
the shift register path concatenated) by certain instructions (for example, EXTEST instruction).  
In the Update-DR controller state, data is latched from the shift register path to the parallel output of this  
register at the falling edge of the TCK pin signal.  
The data retained latched to the parallel output changes depending on this controller state (the data does not  
change with the other controller states).  
The previous states of all the shift register of the boundary scan register selected by the current instruction are  
retained.  
While the TAP controller is in this state, the instruction does not change.  
If the TMS pin signal is held high at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal with the TAP controller in this state,  
the controller enters the Select-DR-Scan state.  
If the TMS pin signal is held low at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal, the TAP controller enters the Run-  
Test/Idle state.  
(11) Capture-IR  
In this controller state, the shift register loads the pattern of a fixed logic value “01(binary)” to the instruction  
register at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal.  
The previous states of both the bypass register and boundary scan register selected by the current instruction  
are retained without change.  
While the TAP controller is in this state, the instruction does not change.  
If the TMS pin signal is held high at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal while the controller is in this state,  
the controller enters the Exit1-IR state.  
If the TMS pin signal is held low at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal, the TAP controller enters the Shift-IR  
state.  
(12) Shift-IR  
In this controller state, TDI and TDO are connected by the shift register in the instruction register. The shift  
data is shift one state toward the serial output direction at each rising edge of the TCK pin signal.  
The boundary scan register or bypass register selected by the current instruction holds the previous state  
without change.  
While the TAP controller is in this state, the instruction does not change.  
If the TMS pin signal is held high at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal with the TAP controller in this state,  
the controller enters the Exit1-IR state. If the TMS pin signal is held low, the controller remains the Shift-IR  
state.  
135  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
(13) Exit1-IR  
This is a temporary controller state. If the TMS pin signal is held high at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal,  
the TAP controller enters the Update-IR state. This ends the scan process.  
If the TMS pin signal is held low at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal, the TAP controller enters the Pause-  
IR state.  
Both the bypass register and boundary scan register selected by the current instruction retain their states  
without change.  
While the TAP controller is in this state, the instruction does not change.  
(14) Pause-IR  
In this controller state, shift of the instruction register is temporarily stopped. The bypass register and  
boundary scan register selected by the current instruction hold the previous state without change.  
While the TAP controller is in this state, the instruction does not change. The instruction register holds the  
current state.  
While the TMS pin signal is low, the TAP controller remains in this state. If the TMS pin signal is held high at  
the rising edge of the TCK pin signal, the TAP controller enters the Exit2-IR state.  
(15) Exit2-IR  
This is a temporary controller state. If the TMS pin signal is held high at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal,  
the TAP controller enters the Update-IR state. This ends the scan process.  
If the TMS pin signal is held low at the rising edge of the TCK pin, the TAP controller enters the Shift-IR state.  
Both the bypass register and boundary scan register selected by the current instruction retain their states  
without change.  
While the TAP controller is in this state, or while the instruction register holds the current state, the instruction  
does not change.  
(16) Update-IR  
In this controller state, the instruction shifted to the instruction register is latched to the parallel output from the  
shift register path at the falling edge of the TCK pin signal. Once a new instruction has been latched, it is used  
as the current instruction.  
The bypass register or boundary scan register selected by the current instruction holds the previous state.  
If the TMS pin signal is held high at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal while the TAP controller is in this  
state, the TAP controller enters the Select-DR-Scan state.  
If the TMS pin signal is held low at the rising edge of the TCK pin signal, the TAP controller enters the Run-  
Test/Idle state.  
The Pause-DR controller state in (8) and Pause-IR controller state in (14) temporarily stop shifting of data in  
the bypass register, the boundary scan register, or instruction register.  
136  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
6.5 TAP Controller Operation  
The TAP controller operates as follows.  
The state of the controller is changed by either of (1) and (2) below.  
(1) Rising edge of TCK pin signal  
(2) TRST# pin input  
The TAP controller generates signals that control the operations of the bypass register, boundary scan register,  
and instruction register defined by the IEEE1149.1 JTAG Boundary Scan Standard (refer to Figures 6-4 and 6-5).  
The TDO pin output buffer and the peripheral circuit that selects a register whose contents are to be output to the  
TDO pin are controlled as shown in Table 6-1. The TDO pin defined in this table changes at the falling edge of the  
TCK pin signal after it has entered each state.  
Table 6-1. Operation in Each Controller State  
Controller State  
Test-Logic-Reset  
Selected Register to Be Driven to TDO Pin  
Undefined  
TDO Pin Driver  
High impedance  
Run-Test/Idle  
Select-DR-Scan  
Select-IR-Scan  
Capture-IR  
Shift-IR  
Instruction register  
Undefined  
Active  
Exit1-IR  
High impedance  
Pause-IR  
Exit2-IR  
Update-IR  
Capture-DR  
Shift-DR  
Data register (boundary scan register,  
bypass register)  
Active  
Exit1-DR  
Undefined  
High impedance  
Pause-DR  
Exit2-DR  
Update-DR  
137  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
Figure 6-4. Operation of Test Logic (Instruction Scan)  
TCK pin signal  
TMS pin signal  
Controller state  
TDI pin signal  
Input data to IR  
IR shift register  
Parallel output of IR  
Input data to TDRNote  
Bypass  
New instruction  
Old data  
TDR shift register  
Parallel output of TDR  
Selected register  
Instruction register  
TDO enable signal  
TDO pin signal  
Inactive  
Active  
Inactive  
Active  
Inactive  
Note TDR (Test Data Register): Boundary scan register and bypass register  
Remark : don’t care or undefined  
138  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
Figure 6-5. Operation of Test Logic (Data Scan)  
TCK pin signal  
TMS pin signal  
Controller state  
TDI pin signal  
Input data to IR  
IR shift register  
Instruction  
Old data  
Bypass  
Parallel output of IR  
Input data to TDRNote  
TDR shift register  
New instruction  
Inactive  
Parallel output of TDR  
Selected register  
TDO enable signal  
TDO pin signal  
Inactive  
Active  
Inactive  
Active  
Note TDR (Test Data Register): Boundary scan register and bypass register  
Remark : don’t care or undefined  
139  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
6.6 Initializing TAP Controller  
The TAP controller is initialized as follows:  
(1) The TAP controller is not initialized by the operation of system input such as system reset.  
(2) The TAP controller enters the Test-Logic-Reset controller state at the fifth rising edge of the TCK pin signal  
(while the TMS pin signal is held high).  
(3) The TAP controller asynchronously enters the Test-Logic-Reset state when the TRST# signal is input.  
6.7 Instruction Register  
This register is defined as follows (refer to 6.2 Internal Configuration of Boundary Scan Circuit).  
(1) The instruction shifted and input to the instruction register is latched so that it changes only in the Update-IR  
and Test-Logic-Reset controller states.  
(2) Data is not inverted since it has been serially input to the instruction register until it is serially output.  
(3) A fixed binary pattern data “01” (with LSB (Least Significant Bit) being “1”) is loaded to this register cell in the  
Capture-IR controller state.  
(4) A fixed binary pattern data “01” (with LSB being “1”) is loaded to this register cell in the Test-Logic-Reset  
controller state.  
(5) While this register is read, data is output from the TDO pin, starting from the LSB to the MSB (Most Significant  
Bit), at each falling edge of the TCK pin signal.  
The JTAG boundary scan circuit of the µPD98433 can support only the following three instructions depending on  
the data set to the instruction register.  
• BYPASS instruction  
• EXTEST instruction  
• SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction  
Instruction Register  
Supported Instruction  
D1  
D0  
0
0
0
1
1
EXTEST instruction  
1
SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction  
Reserved  
0
1
BYPASS instruction  
140  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
CHAPTER 6 JTAG BOUNDARY SCAN  
6.7.1 BYPASS instruction  
This instruction is specified by instruction data “11”. This instruction is used to select only the bypass register (to  
access between the TDI and TDO pins serially) in the Shift-DR controller state.  
While this instruction is selected, the operation of the JTAG boundary scan circuit does not affect the operation of  
the µPD98433.  
This bypass instruction is selected while the TAP controller is in the Test-Logic-Reset state.  
6.7.2 EXTEST instruction  
This instruction is specified by instruction data “00”. In the Shift-DR controller state, this instruction is used to  
select the boundary scan register of serial access between the TDI and TDO instructions.  
• While this instruction is selected:  
The states of all the signals driven from the system output pins are completely defined by the data shifted to the  
boundary scan register. In the Update-DR controller state, the states of all the signals are changed only by the  
falling edge of the TCK pin signal.  
The states of all the signals input from the system input pins are loaded to the boundary scan register at the  
rising edge of the TCK pin signal while the TAP controller is in the Capture-DR state.  
6.7.3 SAMPLE/PRELOAD instruction  
This instruction is specified by instruction data “01”. This instruction is used to implement two functions: SAMPLE  
and PRELOAD.  
141  
Preliminary User’s Manual S15212EJ3V0UM  
Regional Information  
Some information contained in this document may vary from country to country. Before using any NEC  
Electronics product in your application, pIease contact the NEC Electronics office in your country to  
obtain a list of authorized representatives and distributors. They will verify:  
Device availability  
Ordering information  
Product release schedule  
Availability of related technical literature  
Development environment specifications (for example, specifications for third-party tools and  
components, host computers, power plugs, AC supply voltages, and so forth)  
Network requirements  
In addition, trademarks, registered trademarks, export restrictions, and other legal issues may also vary  
from country to country.  
[GLOBAL SUPPORT]  
http://www.necel.com/en/support/support.html  
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.  
Hong Kong  
Tel: 2886-9318  
NEC Electronics America, Inc. (U.S.)  
Santa Clara, California  
Tel: 408-588-6000  
NEC Electronics (Europe) GmbH  
Duesseldorf, Germany  
Tel: 0211-65 03 01  
800-366-9782  
NEC Electronics Hong Kong Ltd.  
Seoul Branch  
• Sucursal en España  
Madrid, Spain  
Tel: 091-504 27 87  
Seoul, Korea  
Tel: 02-558-3737  
• Succursale Française  
Vélizy-Villacoublay, France  
Tel: 01-30-67 58 00  
NEC Electronics Shanghai, Ltd.  
Shanghai, P.R. China  
Tel: 021-6841-1138  
• Filiale Italiana  
Milano, Italy  
Tel: 02-66 75 41  
NEC Electronics Taiwan Ltd.  
Taipei, Taiwan  
Tel: 02-2719-2377  
• Branch The Netherlands  
Eindhoven, TheNetherlands  
Tel: 040-2445845  
NEC Electronics Singapore Pte. Ltd.  
Novena Square, Singapore  
Tel: 6253-8311  
• Tyskland Filial  
Taeby, Sweden  
Tel: 08-63 80 820  
• United Kingdom Branch  
Milton Keynes, UK  
Tel: 01908-691-133  
J03.4  

相关型号:

UPD98452

Analog IC
ETC

UPD98501

LAN Controller, 12.5MBps, CMOS, PBGA352, TBGA-352
NEC

UPD98501N7-F6

LAN Controller, 3 Channel(s), 12.5MBps, CMOS, PBGA352, 35 X 35 MM, BGA-352
NEC

UPD98501N7-F6-A

3 CHANNEL(S), 100Mbps, LOCAL AREA NETWORK CONTROLLER, PBGA352, 35 X 35 MM, BGA-352
RENESAS

UPD98501N7-F6-A

LAN Controller, 3 Channel(s), 12.5MBps, CMOS, PBGA352, 35 X 35 MM, BGA-352
NEC

UPD98502N7-H6

LAN Controller, 3 Channel(s), 12.5MBps, CMOS, PBGA500, 40 X 40 MM, BGA-500
NEC

UPD98502N7-H6-A

LAN Controller, 3 Channel(s), 12.5MBps, CMOS, PBGA500, 40 X 40 MM, BGA-500
NEC

UPD98503N7-B6

LAN Controller, 2 Channel(s), 12.5MBps, CMOS, PBGA256, 27 X 27 MM, BGA-256
NEC

UPD98503N7-B6-A

LAN Controller, 2 Channel(s), 12.5MBps, CMOS, PBGA256, 27 X 27 MM, BGA-256
NEC

UPD9903

UPD9903 ANALOG SUBSCRIBER LINE LSI DIGITAL CODEC
NEC

UPD9903GT

UPD9903 ANALOG SUBSCRIBER LINE LSI DIGITAL CODEC
NEC

UPD9930

LINEAR CODEC FOR DIGITAL CELLULAR TELEPHONE
NEC